Mi.50 M2HB QCB Infanteria

FN HERSTAL
MI.50 M2HB QCB

Infantry Machine Gun
Calibre .50 (12.7 x 99 mm)
Maintenance manual
August 2009 (Change 2)
Catalog n° 3660084070
FN HERSTAL MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
IT MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED

TO A THIRD PARTY WITHOUT PRIOR FORMAL
CONSENT OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
Maintenance manual
-1- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
NOTES : - The descriptions and illustrations in this maintenance manual may

differ slightly from the present configuration of the product. This would
reflect the constant evolution of the product during its industrial life.
- Data in this manual is technical only and of no contractual value.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 : GENERALITIES
1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9

1.2. Description ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3. Technical data................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight ........................................................................ 10
1.3.2. Functional data ................................................................................... 10
1.3.3. Ballistics .............................................................................................. 11
1.4. Accessories ....................................................................................................... 12
1.5. Kits .................................................................................................................. 12
1.6. Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 13
CHAPTER 2 : IDENTIFICATION OF THE PARTS
2.1. How to order parts ............................................................................................ 15

2.2. Parts lists .......................................................................................................... 15
2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] ................................................................................. 17
2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] ............................................................................. 21
2.2.3. Barrel extension group [ 3 ]................................................................... 33
2.2.4. Feed cover group [ 4 ] .......................................................................... 37
2.2.5. Bolt group [ 5 ] .................................................................................... 43
2.2.6. Rear sight group [ 6 ] ........................................................................... 49
2.2.7. Buffer group [ 7 ] ................................................................................. 53
2.2.8. Cocking handle group [ 8 ] .................................................................. 57
2.2.9. Back plate group [ 9 ] .......................................................................... 63
CHAPTER 3 : OPERATING PRINCIPLES
3.1. Empty machine gun in the initial condition ........................................................... 69

3.2. Loading and cocking the machine gun ................................................................ 69
3.3. Firing the machine gun ...................................................................................... 69
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts ......................................................... 71
3.3.2. The feeding operation .......................................................................... 77
3.3.3. The firing operation ............................................................................. 81
Maintenance manual
-2- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 4 : SAFETY INFORMATION
4.1. Warnings and cautions ...................................................................................... 83

4.2. Safety checks .................................................................................................... 83
CHAPTER 5 : RECEPTION OF THE GUN
....................................................................................................................... 87
CHAPTER 6 : USING THE MACHINE GUN
6.1. Preparatory operations ....................................................................................... 89

6.2. Loading and cocking the machine gun ................................................................ 91
6.3. Firing the machine gun ...................................................................................... 93
6.4. Unloading the machine gun ............................................................................... 95
CHAPTER 7 : FIELD STRIPPING
7.1. Disassembling the machine gun ......................................................................... 97

7.2. Reassembling the machine gun ........................................................................ 101
CHAPTER 8 : MAINTENANCE
8.1. Lubricant specifications .................................................................................... 107

8.2. Cleaning and lubrication before firing ............................................................... 109
8.3. Cleaning and lubrication after firing .................................................................. 111
CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
9.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] ............................................................................................ 119

9.1.1. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle assembly (120) .......... 119
9.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle locking latch (125) ..... 121
9.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle (123) ........................ 121
Maintenance manual
-3- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (continued)
9.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] ......................................................................................... 123

9.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500)
and the front cartridge stop (3828) ...................................................... 123
9.2.2. Disassembling and reassembling the rear cartridge stop assembly
(3500) .............................................................................................. 125
9.2.3. Removal and reinstallation of the left and right belt holding pawls (3601)
and (3602) ....................................................................................... 127
9.2.4. Removal and reinstallation of the guide screw (3861) and the safety
washer (3863) ................................................................................... 129
9.2.5. Removal of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818) .................... 131
9.2.6. Reinstallation of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818) ............. 133
9.2.7. Removal of the breech bearing (3819) ................................................. 137
9.2.8. Reinstallation of the breech bearing (3819) .......................................... 139
9.2.9. Removal and reinstallation of the locking pin (3821) ............................. 141
9.2.10. Removal of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring (3812)... 143
9.2.11. Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring
(3812) .............................................................................................. 143
9.2.12. Removal and reinstallation of the trigger bar (3846) ............................. 145
9.2.13. Removal and reinstallation of the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651)
and the trigger bar stop bracket (3653) ............................................... 145
9.2.14. Removal and reinstallation of the front sight (3824), the front sight
cover (3826) and the front sight base (3854) ....................................... 147
9.2.15. Removal and reinstallation of the cover pawl (3831) and its spring
(3832) .............................................................................................. 147
9.2.16. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the bolt latch
assembly (B4) .................................................................................... 149
9.2.17. Removal of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837) ................. 151
9.2.18. Reinstallation of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837)........... 153
9.3. Barrel extension group [ 3 ] .............................................................................. 155
9.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (241) ........ 155
9.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock (221) .............................. 157
9.3.3. Marking the barrel extension body (C1) ............................................... 159
9.4. Feed cover group [ 4 ] ..................................................................................... 161
9.4.1. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover (D1) ................................. 161
9.4.2. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed
slide assembly (D2) ............................................................................ 163
9.4.3. Disassembling and reassembling the belt feed slide assembly (D2) ......... 165
9.4.4. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch spring (472) .............. 167
9.4.5. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor spring (476) ........................ 167
9.4.6. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch shaft (440) and the
feed cover latch (479) ........................................................................ 169
Maintenance manual
-4- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (continued)
9.5. Bolt group [ 5 ] ............................................................................................... 171

9.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) ......... 171
9.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt switch (831) ............................... 171
9.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking lever (865) and its pin (866) ... 173
9.5.4. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin spring stop (868) and the
lock (867) ......................................................................................... 173
9.5.5. Removal and reinstallation of the sear slide (864), the sear (863) and
its spring (862) .................................................................................. 175
9.5.6. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin assembly (E2) ...................... 175
9.5.7. Disassembling and reassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (840) .... 177
9.5.8. Disassembling and reassembling the firing pin assembly (E2) ................. 179
9.5.9. Marking the bolt (820) ....................................................................... 181
9.6. Rear sight group [ 6 ] ....................................................................................... 183
9.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight assembly (500) ................... 183
9.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight leaf assembly (520), the
rear sight windage knob (541) and the rear sight windage adjusting
screw (545) ....................................................................................... 185
9.6.3. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight windage scale (547) ............ 187
9.6.4. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight base spring (549) ............... 187
9.6.5. Disassembly and reassembly of the rear sight leaf assembly (520) .......... 189
9.7. Buffer group [ 7 ] ............................................................................................ 193
9.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer body lock (961) ....................... 193
9.7.2. Removal and reinstallation of the accelerator (962) .............................. 195
9.7.3. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock depressors (912).............. 195
9.7.4. Disassembly and reassembly of the barrel buffer assembly (920) ............ 197
9.8. Cocking handle group [ 8 ] .............................................................................. 199
9.8.1. Removal of the cocking handle assembly (H1) ...................................... 199
9.8.2. Reinstallation of the cocking handle assembly (H1) ............................... 201
9.8.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide lever (713), the cocking
handle (730) and the cocking handle spring (716/1) ............................ 203
9.8.4. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the cocking slide
assembly (H2).................................................................................... 205
9.8.5. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide stud (726) ..................... 207
9.8.6 Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide plunger (721) and its
spring (722) ...................................................................................... 207
9.9. Back plate group [ 9 ] ...................................................................................... 209
9.9.1. Removal and reinstallation of a handle grip (632) and its tube (631) ...... 209
9.9.2. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer tube sleeve (620), the buffer
plate (634), the fiber buffer disks (635) and the buffer disks screw
(636) ................................................................................................ 211
9.9.3. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch lock (644) and its
spring (646) ...................................................................................... 213
9.9.4. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch (648) and its spring
(649) ................................................................................................ 213
9.9.5. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the safety
assembly (660) .................................................................................. 215
9.9.6. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt latch release (639), the trigger
(641) and the springs (643) ................................................................ 217
Maintenance manual
-5- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 10 : INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS
10.1. Checking the firing precision ............................................................................ 219

10.2. Adjustment of the sights ................................................................................... 221
10.3. Checking and gauging the barrel (110) / (110/1) .............................................. 223
10.4. Checking and gauging the headspace .............................................................. 231
10.4.1. Checking and gauging the headspace at the FM/AM level .................... 233
10.4.2. Checking and gauging the headspace at the GM level ......................... 237
10.5. Timing adjustment ........................................................................................... 239
10.5.1. Checking the timing ........................................................................... 239
10.5.2. Adjustment of the timing ..................................................................... 241
10.6. Checking the bolt group [ 5 ] ........................................................................... 245
CHAPTER 11 : TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1. The gun does not fire correctly when the trigger (641) is pushed down ................. 246
11.2. Typical problems ............................................................................................. 248
11.3. Removal of a ruptured cartridge case ................................................................ 249
CHAPTER 12 : SPECIAL INTERVENTIONS
12.1. Changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding ......................... 251
12.1.1. Interventions on the bolt group [ 5 ] ..................................................... 251
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 4 ] ........................................... 251
12.1.3. Interventions on the feed tray .............................................................. 255
12.2. Moving the cocking handle assembly (H1) from the right side towards the left
side of the machine gun................................................................................... 257
12.3. Moving the feed cover latch shaft (440) from the left side towards the right
side of the machine gun................................................................................... 263
Maintenance manual
-6- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 13 : KITS
13.1. ‘Anti-aircraft sights’-kit (500/4) ......................................................................... 265

13.1.1. Technical data ................................................................................... 265
13.1.2. List of parts ........................................................................................ 265
13.1.3. Description ........................................................................................ 266
13.1.4. Preparing the ring sight assembly (1400) and the AA rear sight assembly
(1500/1) for use ................................................................................ 267
13.1.5. Cleaning ........................................................................................... 268
13.1.6. Disassembly and reassembly of the ring sight assembly (1400) .............. 268
13.1.7. Disassembly and reassembly of the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) ...... 271
13.1.8. Checking and adjusting the firing precision of the machine gun ............. 275
CHAPTER 14 : ACCESSORIES
14.1. List of accessories (part I) ................................................................................. 279

14.2. List of accessories (part II) ................................................................................ 281
14.3. List of accessories (part III) ................................................................................ 283
14.4. List of accessories (part IV) ............................................................................... 285
14.5. List of accessories (part V) ................................................................................ 287
14.6. List of accessories (part VI) ............................................................................... 289
CHAPTER 15 : TOOLS AND GAUGES
15.1. Tools .............................................................................................................. 291

15.1.1. Tool kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (1000) and
(1000/1) ........................................................................................... 291
15.1.2. List of separate OREA ......................................................................... 293
15.1.3. List of UT........................................................................................... 294
15.2. Gauges .......................................................................................................... 297
15.2.1. FM/AM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry
machine gun (1000/2) and (1000/4) .................................................. 297
15.2.2. GM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry
machine gun (1000/3) and (1000/5) .................................................. 299
15.2.3. List of separate gauges ....................................................................... 301
CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
..................................................................................................................... 303
Maintenance manual
-7- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Chrome-plated barrel
(°)
(*)
Stellited chrome-plated barrel
(°)
(*)
Fig. 1 - The 2 versions of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
(°) In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, the front sight and
its components are replaced by a ring sight assembly (also refer to § 13.1).
(*) In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, the rear sight
group is replaced by an appropriate rear sight assembly (also refer to § 13.1).
Maintenance manual
-8- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 1 : GENERALITIES
1.1. INTRODUCTION
This manual is intended for the personnel responsible for the maintenance of the
MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun.
The purpose of the manual is to familiarise the personnel with the operation and the
maintenance of the gun, to explain the removal, disassembly, repair and/or replacement of the
component parts and to supply the appropriate inspection, gauging and adjustment
procedures.
1.2. DESCRIPTION
The MI.50 M2HB (Heavy Barrel) QCB (Quick Change Barrel) infantry machine gun is a short-
recoil-operated, automatic weapon firing the .50 (12.7 x 99 mm) ammunition.
The MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun is available in 2 versions with no particular
external differencies (Fig. 1) :
Barrel Chrome-plated Stellited chrome-plated
Ammunition feeding Left-hand (*) Left-hand (*)
Disintegrating Disintegrating
M2 or M9 link M2 or M9 link
Empty cases ejection Downwards Downwards
Links ejection To the right (**) To the right (**)
Cocking system Manual cocking handle (***) Manual cocking handle (***)
Trigger On the back plate On the back plate
Provided with a safety Provided with a safety
Back plate Spade grips Spade grips
(*) The weapon can be changed from left-hand to right-hand feeding by using the
corresponding accessory kit.
(**) When the weapon has been changed to right-hand feeding, the links are ejected
towards the left side.
(***) In the standard configuration, the cocking handle is at the right side. If desired, the
cocking handle can be moved towards the left side, independently if the weapon is
changed to right-hand feeding or not.
Unless specified differently, all paragraphs of this maintenance manual apply to the 2 versions
of the MI.50 M2HB QCB.
Maintenance manual
-9- Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1.3. TECHNICAL DATA
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight
Chrome-plated barrel Stellited chrome-plated barrel
Overall length 1654 mm (65.1“)
Width 228 mm (9.0”)
Height 193 mm (7.6”) (°)
Weight (empty) ± 38 kg (84 lb)
(°) ‘With lowered sights’ in case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit
1.3.2. Functional data
Operating principle : By short-recoil of the barrel

Calibre : .50 (12.7 x 99 mm)
Firing modes : Single-shot, full-automatic
Barrel length : 1143 mm (45.0”)
Barrel weight : 12 kg (26.46 lb)
Rifled length : 1035 mm (40.7”)
Distance between front
and rear sights (*) : 505 mm (19.9”)
Distance between line of
sights and barrel bore (*) : 90 mm (3.6”)
Sight setting (*) : From 0 m to 2500 m :
- Rear sight leaf assembly (520) lowered (for quick firing
(combat situations, ...)) :
Fixed battlesight set for approx. 800 m
- Rear sight leaf assembly (520) raised :
Adjustable from 200 m to 1200 m in steps of 200 m
and from 1200 m to 2500 m in steps of 100 m
Barrel cooling : By air
Number of grooves : 8
Twist and direction : 381 mm (15.0”) right-hand
Cyclic rate of fire : 450 - 635 rpm
Effective rate of fire : 100 rpm
(*) In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, refer to § 13.1.1.
The specifications and other figures are given for indication only and have no contractual value.
FN HERSTAL S.A. reserves the right to modify or to change the specifications at any time without prior notice.
Maintenance manual
- 10 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1.3. TECHNICAL DATA (continued)
1.3.3. Ballistics
.50 (12.7 x 99 mm) calibre ammunition
Overall length : 138.43 mm (5.45”)
Muzzle velocity : 916 m/s with M33
Initial kinetic energy : 18,040 J with M33
Effective range : 1,850 m (± 6,000 ft) (depending on the ammunition)
Maximum range : 6,500 m (± 21,000 ft)
Main types of ammunition :
Name Bullet tip colour Ammunition type

(according to
the standard
STANAG
2953/AOP-2B)
M33 None Ball
M17 Red T (Tracer)
AP-M8 Black AP (Armour - Piercing)
API-M8 Silver API (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary)
APT-115 Red and black APT (Armour - Piercing - Tracer)
APIT-M20 Red and silver APIT (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary - Tracer)
APEI-169 Silver and yellow APEI (Armour - Piercing - Explosive - Incendiary)
NOTE : Blank ammunition is also available.
When using blank ammunition, the combined recoil booster assembly (also refer to
§ 14.3), should be installed on the machine gun.
Maintenance manual
- 11 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1.4. ACCESSORIES
Chrome-plated barrel Stellited chrome-plated barrel
Barrel periscopic inspection device OK
Web barrel cover Available in olive-green and sand-yellow
Web weapon cover Available in sand-yellow
Cordura weapon cover Available in olive-green
Pair of anti-heat gloves OK
Flash-hider assembly OK
Linking and delinking machine OK
Inversion kit feeding / cocking OK

(left-hand <-> right-hand)
Combined recoil booster assembly OK
NATO base rear sight assembly + OK

Picatinny support (*)
NATO base AA rear sight assembly + OK

Picatinny support (-)
NATO base AA rear sight assembly + OK

AA rear optical sight (-)
Kit Picatinny rail OK
(*) Not applicable in case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit
(-) Only applicable in case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit
OK : Available as accessory for this (these) MI.50 M2HB QCB version(s)
1.5. KITS
Refer to Chrome-plated barrel Stellited chrome-plated barrel
Anti-aircraft sights § 13.1 OK
OK : Available as kit for this (these) MI.50 M2HB QCB version(s)
Chapters 1 to 12 and 14 to 16 of this maintenance manual have been written for

the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun without kits.
If the presence of a kit on the machine gun has a significant influence on the
information contained in these chapters, a special remark and/or a reference
towards the appropriate (sub)paragraph of chapter 13 will be made.
Maintenance manual
- 12 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1.6. ABBREVIATIONS
CAT n° : Catalog number

Fig. : Figure
ft : Feet
g: Gram
HB : Heavy Barrel
J: Joule
kg : Kilograms
lb : Pounds
m: Metres
mm : Millimetres
m/s : Metres/second
N: Newton
OREA : “Outil de Réparation et d’Entretien Armes” (special tool for weapon repair and
maintenance)
QCB : Quick Change Barrel
Qty : Quantity
rpm : Rounds per minute
s: Seconds
UT : Universal Tool (commercial tool not considered as a FN Herstal product, but which
can be supplied on special request)
“: Inch
NOTE : A vertical line at the left side of a paragraph, an illustration, a table, ... indicates
that (a part of) the latter has been changed compared to the previous ‘change’
version.
Maintenance manual
- 13 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
[1]
[8]
[4]
[6]
(°) (*)
[2]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[3] [7]
[5] a
Fig. 2.a - The 9 main groups of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 14 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 2 : IDENTIFICATION OF THE PARTS
2.1. HOW TO ORDER PARTS
For ordering parts, refer to the ‘Catalog of parts and accessories’ of the MI.50 M2HB QCB
infantry machine gun.
2.2. PARTS LISTS
The MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun is subdivided into 9 groups (Fig. 2.a) :
Group Description Fig. Paragraph
[1] Barrel group 2.b 2.2.1
[2] Receiver group (part I) 2.c.1 2.2.2.1

Receiver group (part II) (°) 2.c.2 2.2.2.2
[3] Barrel extension group 2.d 2.2.3
[4] Feed cover group 2.e 2.2.4
[5] Bolt group 2.f 2.2.5
[6] Rear sight group (*) 2.g 2.2.6
[7] Buffer group 2.h 2.2.7
[8] Cocking handle group 2.i 2.2.8
[9] Back plate group 2.j 2.2.9
(°) In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, the front sight
(3824), the front sight base (3854) and the front sight cover (3826) are replaced by the
ring sight assembly (1400) (also refer to § 13.1).
group [ 6 ] is replaced by the rear sight assembly (1500/1) (also refer to § 13.1).
Maintenance manual
- 15 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
126
120
123
127 125
121
IV
a
a
II
122
V
III
I
3817
3818
(Fig. 2.c.1)
(Fig. 2.c.1)
110 (*)
110/1 (**)
b
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
201
(Fig. 2.d)
Fig. 2.b - Barrel group [ 1 ]
Maintenance manual
- 16 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2. PARTS LISTS (continued)
2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.b)
CAT n° Description Qty per unit
110 Barrel, chromium plating QCB phos EPR (spare) (*) 1

110/1 Barrel, stellite liner QCB phos EPR (spare) (**) 1
120 Carrying handle assembly 1
121 > Handle body and rod assembly 1
122 > Spring type straight pin, slotted 1
123 > Plastic jacket, barrel carrier assembly 1
125 > Latch, handle, locking barrel 1
126 > Plain washer 1
127 > Nut, hexagonal, self-locking, single slot 1
(*) Only MI.50 M2HB QCB with chrome-plated barrel

(**) Only MI.50 M2HB QCB with stellited chrome-plated barrel
(b) Description
The barrel group [ 1 ] of the MI.50 M2HB QCB consists of the barrel (110) / (110/1)
onto which the carrying handle assembly (120) has been fitted.
The only difference between the 2 versions of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun described in
this maintenance manual is the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) :
• MI.50 M2HB QCB with chrome-plated barrel (marked ‘STD-CHR’)
• MI.50 M2HB QCB with stellited chrome-plated barrel (marked ‘CHR-STL’)
The barrel (110) / (110/1) is of the QCB(Quick Change Barrel)-type : it can be removed
and installed quickly and easily.
The barrel (110) / (110/1) is fitted, through the barrel support (3817) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1)
and the front opening of the receiver group [ 2 ], into the barrel extension body (C1) (also refer
to § 2.2.3) and then secured into position by turning the carrying handle assembly (120) by 60°
towards the left side.
In order to ensure that the rear end of the barrel (110) / (110/1) fits correctly into the front
opening of the barrel extension body (C1), the barrel has a slot (I) which should be aligned
with the inner protruding extremity of the guide screw (3861) inside the barrel support (3817)
(also refer to § 2.2.2.1) when the barrel is installed. As a result, the 3 series of outer guides
on the rear end of the barrel engage the corresponding recesses provided in the front
opening of the barrel extension body.
In order to ensure that the barrel (110) / (110/1) can only be installed in one longitudinal
position, its rear end has a special shape.
Note that the correct alignment of the barrel (110) / (110/1) occurs automatically when
the barrel group [ 1 ] is held by the carrying handle assembly (120) when installing it.
When the barrel (110) / (110/1) is correctly installed, and in order to hold back its rotational
movement, the lug on the front end of the barrel locking spring blade (241) (also refer to
§ 2.2.3) engages the corresponding notch provided in the rear end of the barrel.
Maintenance manual
- 17 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
126
120
123
127 125
121
IV
a
a
II
122
V
III
I
3817
3818
(Fig. 2.c.1)
(Fig. 2.c.1)
110 (*)
110/1 (**)
b
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
201
(Fig. 2.d)
Fig. 2.b - Barrel group [ 1 ]
Maintenance manual
- 18 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] (continued)
(b) Description (continued)
The carrying handle assembly (120) is fitted, from the front side, onto the shoulder
approximately at the middle of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and it consists of the carrying
handle body (121) onto which the following components have been installed :
- The carrying handle (123) which is secured to the stem of the carrying handle body
(121) by means of the nut (127) used in combination with the washer (126)
- The carrying handle locking latch (125) which is secured by and can pivot around the
spring pin (122)
When the carrying handle assembly (120) is fitted into position, its rear lug (II) should
engage the notch (III) provided in the barrel (110) / (110/1).
When the rear lug (II) correctly engages the notch (III), the wider part (IV) of the carrying
handle locking latch (125) engages the groove (V) of the barrel (110) / (110/1) so that the
carrying handle assembly (120) is locked into position.
The carrying handle locking latch (125) (and therefore also the carrying handle assembly
(120)) can simply be released by manually raising the upper end of the latch until its wider
part (IV) is disengaged from the groove (V).
NOTE : It is strongly recommended that, if possible, the carrying handle assembly (120) is at
all times installed on the barrel (110) / (110/1) because the position of the carrying
handle assembly allows to see easily if the barrel group [ 1 ] has correctly been
locked into position.
The barrel group [ 1 ] is correctly locked into position when the carrying handle assembly
(120) has been turned by 60° towards the left side.
If the carrying handle assembly (120) is still in the vertical position, the carrying handle
(123) interferes with the line of sights of the machine gun indicating the shooter that the
barrel group [ 1 ] has not been locked into position.
Maintenance manual
- 19 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3861 3818/1 3818/7 3000

3818/2 3818/8
3863 3818/3 3818/9
3818/4 3818/10
B 3818/5 3818/11
3818/6 3818/12
3505
3817
e 3828 d
B B2
3834 l
f c
A
e
d 3504
3820 3503
3502
f
c 3835 3500
h
3819
Y
YY
SY
3834
j
i
j
g
l 3821
3835
k
3822 3813 b B1
k
3816
a
3823
i 3603 a
3601
3100
3602
g
3600 3812
b
All the parts represented
3827 h on Fig. 2.c.2 are also part 3815
of the complete receiver 3000 3814
Fig. 2.c.1 - Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I)
The serial number of the machine gun (required when marking the barrel extension body (C1) (also refer to
§ 9.3.3) or the bolt (820) (also refer to § 9.5.9)) has been marked in the front part of the upper rear plate
of the receiver frame (B1) (also refer to ‘SYYYY’ in the above diagram).
Maintenance manual
- 20 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ]
2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.c.1)
3000 Complete receiver MK2 (for quick change) 1

3100 > Receiver, proved 1
3812 > > Spring, locking 1
3813 > > Screw, breech lock cam 1
3814 > > Nut, locking cam 1
3815 > > Split pin 1
3816 > > Cam, breech lock, receiver assembly 1
3819 > > Bearing, breech thread 1
3820 > > Screw, lock, breech, bearing 1
3500 > Stop, assembly, cartridge, rear 1
3502 > > Pawl, aligning, cartridge 1
3503 > > Plunger, cartridge aligning pawl 1
3504 > > Spring, cartridge 1
3505 > > Pin, straight, headless 1
3600 > Pawl, assembly, belt holding 1
3601 > > Pawl, belt holding, left-hand 1
3602 > > Pawl, belt holding, right-hand 1
3603 > > Sleeve, belt holding pawl 1
3817 > Support barrel 1
3818/1 > Shim, trunnion block 1 1
3821 > Pin, locking, trunnion block 1
3822 > Spring, trunnion block lock 1
3823 > Split pin 1
3827 > Spring, pawl 2
3828 > Stop, front, cartridge 1
3834 > Pin, locking 2
Maintenance manual
- 21 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3861 3818/1 3818/7 3000

3818/2 3818/8
3863 3818/3 3818/9
3818/4 3818/10
B 3818/5 3818/11
3818/6 3818/12
3505
3817
e 3828 d
B B2
3834 l
f c
A
e
d 3504
3820 3503
3502
f
c 3835 3500
h
3819
Y
YY
SY
3834
j
i
j
g
l 3821
3835
k
3822 3813 b B1
k
3816
a
3823
i 3603 a
3601
3100
3602
g
3600 3812
b
Maintenance manual
- 22 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (continued)
2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I) (continued)
(a) List of parts (continued)
3835 > Pin, belt holding pawl 2

3861 > Screw, guide, barrel quick change MK2 1
3863 > Safety washer, screw and plug 1
> Also refer to § 2.2.2.2
The following parts or assemblies cannot be ordered (separately) : a number has however been
attributed in order to facilitate the descriptions throughout this maintenance manual :
N° Description Qty per unit
B1 Receiver frame 1
B2 Rear cartridge stop 1
(b) Description
The receiver group [ 2 ] (catalog number (3000), also called ‘complete receiver’) consists
of the receiver (3100) onto or into which the following assemblies and components have
been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.c.2 and described in § 2.2.2.2.
- The rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and the front cartridge stop (3828), mounted
onto the right side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver
(3100)
The rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and the front cartridge stop (3828) are held in place
by a mounting pin (3835) which, on its turn, is secured by means of a locking pin (3834).
The rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) consists of the rear cartridge stop (B2) which is used
to retain the corresponding link when the cartridge is extracted from the ammunition belt and
which has been provided with the cartridge aligning pawl (3502).
The cartridge aligning pawl (3502), used in combination with the front cartridge stop
(3828), ensures that the cartridge is positioned so that its rim can correctly be engaged by
the extractor/ejector assembly (840) (also refer to § 2.2.5).
The cartridge aligning pawl (3502) is secured by and can pivot around the pin (3505) and
is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its spring (3504) used in combination
with the corresponding plunger (3503).
Please note that this configuration corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed
MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to
§ 12.1), the front cartridge stop (3828) will be kept and installed at the left side while the rear
cartridge stop assembly (3500) will be replaced, also at the left side, by the link stripper
(3829) and the rear cartridge stop (3830), both supplied in the optional accessory kit
(8997/2).
Maintenance manual
- 23 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3861 3818/1 3818/7 3000

3818/2 3818/8
3863 3818/3 3818/9
3818/4 3818/10
B 3818/5 3818/11
3818/6 3818/12
3505
3817
e 3828 d
B B2
3834 l
f c
A
e
d 3504
3820 3503
3502
f
c 3835 3500
h
3819
Y
YY
SY
3834
j
i
j
g
l 3821
3835
k
3822 3813 b B1
k
3816
a
3823
i 3603 a
3601
3100
3602
g
3600 3812
b
Maintenance manual
- 24 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I) (continued)

- The belt holding pawls assembly (3600), mounted onto the left side of the ammunition
feeding and ejection section of the receiver (3100) and contributing to the correct
feeding of the ammunition belt
The belt holding pawls assembly (3600) is held in place by a mounting pin (3835) which, on
its turn, is secured by means of a locking pin (3834).
The belt holding pawls assembly (3600) consists of the left and right belt holding pawls
(3601) and (3602), held together by their (hollow) sleeve (3603).
The left and right belt holding pawls (3601) and (3602) can pivot on the mounting pin
(3835) and each pawl is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of a pawl spring
(3827).
§ 12.1), the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) will be installed at the right side.
- The barrel support (3817) which is screwed, together with a shim (3818/1-12), onto
the thread of the trunnion block at the front side of the receiver (3100) and which has
been provided with 2 threaded holes for the guide screw (3861)
The guide screw (3861), fitted into the upper threaded hole of the barrel support (3817) and
used in combination with the safety washer (3863), ensures that the rear end of the barrel
(110) / (110/1) is correctly guided through the barrel support towards the front opening of
the barrel extension body (C1) (also refer to § 2.2.1 and § 2.2.3).
The correct vertical position of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818/1-12) is
ensured by the locking pin (3821) : the front end of the locking pin fits into the small lower
hole (A) of the shim and engages one of the 2 grooves (B) at the rear side of the barrel
support.
The locking pin (3821) itself fits, from the front side, into its hole in the lower front side of
the receiver (3100), is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of the locking spring
(3822) and is secured by means of the split pin (3823).
For more information about the choice of the correct shim (3818), refer to § 9.2.6.
The receiver (3100) consists of the receiver frame (B1) onto which the following
components have been installed :
- The breech bearing (3819) which is screwed into the threaded cylindrical mounting
support at the front side of the receiver frame (B1) and which is held in place by means
of its locking screw (3820)
- The breech lock cam (3816), fitted into its housing in the bottom of the receiver frame
(B1) and used to guide the breech lock (221/13-28) (also refer to § 2.2.3)
The breech lock cam (3816) is fixed by the screw (3813) used in combination with the
locking spring (3812) and the nut (3814) : in order to ensure its correct operation, there
should be a clearance of 0.05 - 0.20 mm between the breech lock cam and the bottom plate
of the receiver frame (B1) (also refer to § 9.2.11).
In order to avoid loosening due to vibrations, the nut (3814) is secured to the screw (3813)
by means of the split pin (3815).
Maintenance manual
- 25 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
B4
3845 3841
3843
d d
3844 3842
3826 3839 e
(°) e
3840
c 3838
b
(°) 3824
III
3654
(°) 3854
3832 3836
c
3831 f
3837 510
II (Fig. 2.g)
I
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) 3653
b
3833
3825 a
3651
3849
3700 B5
3846
All the parts represented on this Fig. 2.c.2

are also part of the complete receiver 3000
(also refer to Fig. 2.c.1)
Fig. 2.c.2 - Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II)
Maintenance manual
- 26 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.c.2)
3000 Complete receiver MK2 (for quick change)

(refer to § 2.2.2.1)
3651 > Nut, plain, knurled 1
3653 > Bracket, stop, adjustable trigger bar 1
3654 > Screw, externally relieved body 1
3700 > Pin, assembly, trigger lever 1
3824 > Sight, front (°) 1
3826 > Cover, front sight (°) 1
3831 > Pawl, cover detent 1
3832 > Spring, cover lock 1
3833 > Nut, rear cam, extractor 1
3836 > Switch, extractor 1
3837 > Spring, extractor, switch 1
3838 > Latch, bolt 1
3839 > Rod, bolt latch 1
3840 > Pin, bolt latch rod 1
3841 > Plunger, bolt latch 1
3842 > Spring, plunger, bolt latch 1
3843 > Spring, bolt latch rod 1
3844 > Nut, bolt latch rod 1
3845 > Split pin 1
3846 > Bar, trigger 1
3849 > Spring, safety, extractor cam nut 1
3854 > Base, front sight (°) 1
B4 Bolt latch assembly 1

B5 Trigger bar stop assembly 1
(°) In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, the front sight
(3824), the front sight base (3854) and the front sight cover (3826) are replaced by the
ring sight assembly (1400) (also refer to § 13.1).
Maintenance manual
- 27 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
B4
3845 3841
3843
d d
3844 3842
3826 3839 e
(°) e
3840
c 3838
b
(°) 3824
III
3654
(°) 3854
3832 3836
c
3831 f
3837 510
II (Fig. 2.g)
I
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) 3653
b
3833
3825 a
3651
3849
3700 B5
3846

Maintenance manual
- 28 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (continued)
(b) Description
The receiver group [ 2 ] (catalog number (3000), also called ‘complete receiver’) consists
of the receiver (3100) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1) onto or into which the following assemblies
and components have been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.c.1 and described in § 2.2.2.1.
- The trigger bar stop assembly (B5) consisting of the trigger bar stop bracket (3653)
onto which the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) has been screwed
The trigger bar stop assembly (B5) is fixed to the inner upper rear part of the receiver (3100)
by means of the screw (3654) which is also used to secure the rear end of the rear sight base
(510) (also refer to § 2.2.6).
The trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) determines the upper limit position of the rear end of
the trigger bar (3846) which, on its turn, determines the timing of the machine gun. The
correct position of the knurled nut is therefore determined by carrying out the timing
adjustment described in § 10.5.
Once it has been adjusted correctly, the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) is held in place
by the engagement of the screw (3654) into one of its notches (also refer to § 10.5).
- The trigger bar (3846) which is secured by and can pivot around its pin (3700)
The trigger bar (3846) is used to transmit the movement of the trigger (641) (also refer to
§ 2.2.9) towards the sear (863) which controls the operation of the firing pin (861) (also refer
to § 2.2.5).
As described above, the upper limit position of the rear end of the trigger bar (3846), which
determines the timing of the machine gun, is adjusted by positioning the trigger bar stop
knurled nut (3651) as described in § 10.5.
- The front sight (3824) which is screwed into the front sight base (3854) and which is
protected by means of the front sight cover (3826)
The front sight base (3854) fits into the central groove at the upper front side of the receiver
(3100) while the front sight cover (3826) fits into the 2 outer grooves.
Both the front sight base (3854) and the front sight cover (3826) are secured by means of
the 2 spring pins (3825).
The upper hole in the front sight cover (3826) allows adjusting the front sight (3824) without
having to remove the cover.
In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, the front sight (3824),
the front sight base (3854) and the front sight cover (3826) are replaced by the ring sight
assembly (1400) (also refer to § 13.1).
- The cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832) fitted, from the rear side, into their
housing underneath the front sight
The cover pawl (3831), held in a spring-tensioned position by its spring (3832), ensures that
the feed cover (D1) is correctly held at its closed and opened positions.
Maintenance manual
- 29 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
B4
3845 3841
3843
d d
3844 3842
3826 3839 e
(°) e
3840
c 3838
b
(°) 3824
III
3654
(°) 3854
3832 3836
c
3831 f
3837 510
II (Fig. 2.g)
I
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) 3653
b
3833
3825 a
3651
3849
3700 B5
3846

Maintenance manual
- 30 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (continued)
- The extractor switch (3836), provided on the inner side of the left side plate of the
receiver (3100) and used, in combination with the extractor spring (476) and the
extractor guide cam in the feed cover (D1) and with the special cam riveted to the inner
side of the left side plate of the receiver, to guide the front end of the extractor/ejector
assembly (840) (also refer to § 2.2.4 and § 2.2.5)
The extractor switch (3836) is secured by means of the nut (3833) which is screwed, at the
left outer side of the receiver (3100), onto the pin of the switch.
In order to avoid loosening due to vibrations, the nut (3833) is secured to the pin of the
extractor switch (3836) by means of the safety spring (3849).
The extractor switch (3836) is held at its raised position by means of its spring (3837) which
engages the special groove provided in the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver
(3100).
The little curved extremity (I) of the extractor switch spring (3837) fits into the hole
provided in the groove for the spring while the other extremity of the spring is located
under the shoulder (II) of the extractor switch (3836).
- The bolt latch assembly (B4), which is used to hold the bolt (820) back at its rear
position at the end of its rearward movement
The main components of the bolt latch assembly (B4) are the bolt latch rod (3839) and the
bolt latch (3838) itself, held together by the pin (3840) onto which the bolt latch can pivot.
After having received the bolt latch rod spring (3843), the front part of the bolt latch rod
(3839) is inserted, from the rear side, into the bolt latch mounting bracket (III) provided
inside the receiver (3100).
Using the assembling tool OREA 558 (also refer to § 9.2.16), the bolt latch rod (3839) is
then pushed forwards, against the force of its spring (3843), until its front end protrudes
from the front side of the bolt latch mounting bracket (III).
The front end of the bolt latch rod (3839) is then finally secured by means of the bolt latch
rod nut (3844) which, on its turn, is secured to the rod by the split pin (3845).
The bolt latch plunger (3841) and its spring (3842), provided into their housing on top of the
bolt latch (3838), exert a downward pressure on the bolt latch when the plunger comes into
contact with the inner upper part of the receiver (3100).
As long as the bolt latch release (639) is raised, the bolt latch (3838) can freely pivot
downwards so that it engages and holds back the bolt (820) when the latter reaches the
end of its rearward movement : this situation occurs when the machine gun is set for
single-shot firing.
When the bolt latch release (639) is locked at its lowered position or simply pushed
downwards, the downward pivoting movement of the bolt latch (3838) is restricted by the
front end of the bolt latch release. As a result, the bolt latch (3838) is not able to engage
and hold back the bolt (820) : this situation occurs when the machine gun is set for
automatic firing.
Maintenance manual
- 31 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
110
110/1
(Fig. 2.b)
3817
3818
(Fig. 2.c.1)
(Fig. 2.c.1)
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
200
ZZ
241
C1
a
221/13
c
221/14 221/19 221/24
221/15 221/20 221/25
201 221/16 221/21 221/26
221/17 221/22 221/27
221/18 221/23 221/28
a
YY
YY
230 b
b 962
(Fig. 2.h)
233
Barrel extension body (C1)

represented upside down
Fig. 2.d - Barrel extension group [ 3 ]
The barrel extension assembly (200) may never be interchanged between different machine guns : it must always
be used with the same gun (and especially with the same bolt assembly (810)) !
For that reason, the bottom of the barrel extension body (C1) has been marked with the last four digits of the serial
number of the machine gun (also refer to ‘YYYY’ on the upside down representation in the lower left corner of the
above diagram) (for more information, also refer to § 7.2 and to § 9.3.3).
The number of the breech lock (221) (required when marking the bolt (820) (also refer to § 9.5.9) has been
marked in its cavity (also refer to ‘ZZ’ in the above diagram).
Maintenance manual
- 32 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.3. Barrel extension group [ 3 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.d)
200 Barrel extension, MK2 QCB assembly 1

201 > Extension, barrel QCB, shank and locking spring 1
241 > > Spring blade, locking barrel 1
221/13 > Lock 13, breech (A=14.77+/-0.01) 1
221/14 > Lock 14, breech (A=14.81+/-0.01) 1
221/15 > Lock 15, breech (A=14.85+/-0.01) 1
221/16 > Lock 16, breech (A=14.89+/-0.01) 1
221/17 > Lock 17, breech (A=14.93+/-0.01) 1
221/18 > Lock 18, breech (A=14.97+/-0.01) 1
221/19 > Lock 19, breech (A=15.01+/-0.01) 1
221/20 > Lock 20, breech (A=15.05+/-0.01) 1
221/21 > Lock 21, breech (A=15.09+/-0.01) 1
221/22 > Lock 22, breech (A=15.13+/-0.01) 1
221/23 > Lock 23, breech (A=15.17+/-0.01) 1
221/24 > Lock 24, breech (A=15.21+/-0.01) 1
221/25 > Lock 25, breech (A=15.25+/-0.01) 1
221/26 > Lock 26, breech (A=15.29+/-0.01) 1
221/27 > Lock 27, breech (A=15.33+/-0.01) 1
221/28 > Lock 28, breech (A=15.37+/-0.01) 1
230 > Pin assembly, breech lock 1
C1 Barrel extension body 1
Maintenance manual
- 33 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
110
110/1
(Fig. 2.b)
3817
3818
(Fig. 2.c.1)
(Fig. 2.c.1)
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
200
ZZ
241
C1
a
221/13
c
221/14 221/19 221/24
221/15 221/20 221/25
201 221/16 221/21 221/26
221/17 221/22 221/27
221/18 221/23 221/28
a
YY
YY
230 b
b 962
(Fig. 2.h)
233
Barrel extension body (C1)

represented upside down
Fig. 2.d - Barrel extension group [ 3 ]
For that reason, the bottom of the barrel extension body (C1) has been marked with the last four digits of the serial
number of the machine gun (also refer to ‘YYYY’ on the upside down representation in the lower left corner of the
above diagram) (for more information, also refer to § 7.2 and to § 9.3.3).
The number of the breech lock (221) (required when marking the bolt (820) (also refer to § 9.5.9) has been
marked in its cavity (also refer to ‘ZZ’ in the above diagram).
Maintenance manual
- 34 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.3. Barrel extension group [ 3 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The barrel extension group [ 3 ] (catalog number (200)) forms the link between the barrel
group [ 1 ] and the buffer group [ 7 ].
The front opening of the barrel extension body (C1) has been especially designed to accept the
rear end of the QCB-type barrel (110) / (110/1).
The correct installation of the barrel (110) / (110/1) is ensured by the engagement of the 3
series of outer guides on its rear end into the corresponding inner guides in the front opening
of the barrel extension body (C1).
The rear shank of the barrel extension body (C1) ensures the correct connection with the buffer
group [ 7 ] (also refer to § 2.2.7).
The narrower part of the rear shank fits between and is engaged by the 2 claws of the
accelerator (962) while the rear nose of the shank engages the front nose of the buffer piston
rod (930).
In addition, the barrel extension group [ 3 ] has been provided with the guides for the
back-and-forth movement of the bolt group [ 5 ].
The barrel extension group [ 3 ] consists of the barrel extension body assembly (201)
provided with a breech lock (221/13-28).
The breech lock (221/13-28) is inserted into the corresponding housing at the rear side of the
barrel extension body assembly (201) and is secured in a position allowing a restricted vertical
movement by means of the breech lock pin (230).
On its turn, the breech lock pin (230) is held in place in the breech lock (221/13-28) by means
of the spring pin (233), inserted from underneath.
For more information about the choice of the correct breech lock (221), refer to ‘10.4. Checking
and gauging the headspace’.
The barrel extension body assembly (201) consists of the barrel extension body (C1) with,
on its right side, the barrel locking spring blade (241).
The barrel locking spring blade (241) is fitted, from the front side, into its housing in the right
side of the barrel extension body (C1) and then held into position by staking.
The lug on the front end of the barrel locking spring blade (241) engages the corresponding
notch in the rear end of the barrel (110) / (110/1) when the latter is correctly locked into
position.
Maintenance manual
- 35 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
410 481
VI c
g
IX
b
484
III
V
b
d a
II
a
479
476
IV
472
c
I
450 XI 475
VII
e
440
474
478 VIII 460 471

X D1
430
477 D2 d
482
e 473
f h
483
g
h 400
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
Fig. 2.e - Feed cover group [ 4 ]
Maintenance manual
- 36 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.4. Feed cover group [ 4 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.e)
400 Cover group assembly (for latch to the left) 1

410 > Cover assembly 1
430 > Pawl assembly, belt feed, upper 1
440 > Shaft assembly, cover catch 1
450 > Slide, belt feed 1
460 > Pin assembly, belt feed pawl 1
471 > Lever, belt feed 1
472 > Spring, cover latch 1
473 > Spring, lock, retaining, belt feed lever 1
474 > Spring, helical, compression 1
475 > Pin, feed lever 1
476 > Spring, cover, extractor 1
477 > Arm, belt feed pawl 1
478 > Spring, pawl assembly 1
479 > Latch, cover 1
481 > Washer, shaft, cover latch 1
482 > Pin, cover axis 1
483 > Split pin 1
484 > Split pin 1
D1 Feed cover 1
D2 Belt feed slide assembly 1
(b) Description
The feed cover group [ 4 ] (catalog number (400)) is used to feed the ammunition belt,
from the left side, into the receiver (3100).
Please note that the links are ejected out of the right side of the receiver (3100) and that the
empty cases leave the gun through the ejection opening in the bottom of the receiver.
Also note that this corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB
machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the
ammunition belt is fed from the right side and the links are ejected out of the left side of the
receiver (3100).
Maintenance manual
- 37 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
410 481
VI c
g
IX
b
484
III
V
b
d a
II
a
479
476
IV
472
c
I
450 XI 475
VII
e
440
474
478 VIII 460 471

X D1
430
477 D2 d
482
e 473
f h
483
g
h 400
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
Maintenance manual
- 38 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.4. Feed cover group [ 4 ] (continued)
The feed cover group [ 4 ] consists of the feed cover (D1), secured to the receiver (3100)
by means of the feed cover axis pin (482) which, on its turn, is secured by means of the
split pin (483).
The feed cover (D1) consists of the feed cover body (410) into which the following
assemblies and components have been provided :
- The feed cover latch (479) which is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its
spring (472) and which can be actuated by using the feed cover latch shaft (440)
The feed cover latch (479) ensures that the feed cover (D1) remains correctly locked into
position when it is closed. On the other hand, the latch releases the closed feed cover when
the feed cover latch shaft (440) is turned.
The feed cover latch shaft (440) is fitted into the feed cover body (410) from the left side and
the right end of the shaft is secured by means of the split pin (484) used in combination with
the washer (481).
The feed cover latch shaft (440) has been provided with a slightly protruding central lug (I)
which engages the notch (II) of the hole in the feed cover latch (479).
The feed cover latch spring (472) is fitted, with the wider end of its elongated hole, onto the
small rear mounting pin (III) of the feed cover body (410) and then pushed as far as possible
rearwards.
The feed cover latch spring (472) is oriented so that its front claw (IV) faces the feed cover
body (410).
The feed cover latch spring (472) is positioned correctly when its front claw (IV) engages
the corresponding groove in the feed cover body (410) and when the pointed front part
(V) of the feed cover latch (479) fits between the rear end of the spring and the feed cover
body.
Please note that this corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand mounted feed cover
latch shaft (440) : if its handle has been provided at the right side of the machine gun (also
refer to § 12.3), the shaft is fitted into the feed cover body (410) from the right side.
- The extractor spring (476) used, in combination with the extractor switch (3836) on the
inner side of the left side plate of the receiver (3100), with the special cam riveted to
the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver and with the extractor guide cam (part
of the feed cover body (410)), to guide the front end of the extractor/ejector assembly
(840) (also refer to § 2.2.2.2 and § 2.2.5)
The extractor spring (476) is fitted with its front end onto the small front mounting pin (VI) of
the feed cover body (410) while the lug (VII) on the rear end of the spring fits into the notch
in the extractor guide cam.
Maintenance manual
- 39 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
410 481
VI c
g
IX
b
484
III
V
b
d a
II
a
479
476
IV
472
c
I
450 XI 475
VII
e
440
474
478 VIII 460 471

X D1
430
477 D2 d
482
e 473
f h
483
g
h 400
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
Maintenance manual
- 40 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.4. Feed cover group [ 4 ] (continued)
- The belt feed slide assembly (D2) which is used, in combination with the belt holding
pawls assembly (3600) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1), to push the ammunition belt into the
machine gun
The belt feed slide assembly (D2) consists of the belt feed slide (450) onto which the
assembly formed by the belt feed pawl (430) and the belt feed pawl arm (477) has been
mounted.
The belt feed pawl arm (477) is fitted onto the rear side of the belt feed pawl (430) with its
free extremity (VIII) pointing towards the right side.
The assembly formed by the belt feed pawl (430) and the belt feed pawl arm (477) is
secured to the left side of the belt feed slide (450) by means of the pin (460) and is held
in its raised position by means of the pawl spring (478).
The belt feed slide assembly (D2), which is engaged and actuated by the front end of the belt
feed lever (471), carries out a to-and-fro motion in its housing in the front part of the feed
cover body (410).
§ 12.1), the belt feed slide assembly (D2) is assembled and oriented differently.
For more information about the operation of the belt feed slide assembly (D2), refer to
§ 3.3.2.
- The belt feed lever (471) which converts the back and forth movement of the moving
parts into a to-and-fro motion of the belt feed slide assembly (D2)
The belt feed lever (471) can pivot on the (larger) right mounting pin (IX) of the feed cover
body (410) and is fixed to the mounting pin by means of the retaining spring (473).
The rear end (X) of the belt feed lever (471) engages the appropriate groove on top of the
bolt assembly (810) (also refer to § 2.2.5) while the front end of the lever fits into the notch
(XI) at the rear side of the belt feed slide assembly (D2).
The belt feed lever (471) is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its pin (475) and
the spring (474) which fit into the rear housing in the lever, just behind its pivoting point.
MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer
to § 12.1), the belt feed lever pin (475) and the spring (474) will be fitted into the front
housing in the belt feed lever (471), just in front of its pivoting point.
Maintenance manual
- 41 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
870
831
865
863
823 c
e
d
III
840 II
V
YY
YY-
ZZ
844 867
862
R
L
VII
843 E1 IV e
d
864 VI
f VIII
868 c I
842 820
E2
866
a 853 850
861
852
b
b
a
E3
810
800
Fig. 2.f - Bolt group [ 5 ]
The bolt assembly (810) may never be interchanged between different machine guns : it must always be used with
the same gun (and especially with the same barrel extension assembly (200)) !
For that reason, the upper front part of the bolt (820) has been marked with the last four digits of the serial
number of the machine gun as well as the number of the presently used breech lock (221) (also refer to ‘YYYY-ZZ’
in the above diagram) (for more information, also refer to § 7.2 and to § 9.5.9).
Maintenance manual
- 42 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.5. Bolt group [ 5 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.f)
800 Bolt n°2 group 1

810 > Bolt n°2 complete group 1
820 > > Bolt 2 1
823 > > > Pin, shoulder headless 1
831 > > Switch, bolt alternate feed 1
840 > > Extractor, cartridge, assembly 1
842 > > > Ejector 1
843 > > > Spring, ejector, compression 1
844 > > > Pin, ejector, grooved, headed 1
850 > > Extension, assembly firing pin 1
852 > > > Spring, pin firing 1
853 > > > Pin, retaining firing pin 1
861 > > Pin, firing 1
862 > > Spring, sear compression 1
863 > > Sear 1
864 > > Slide, sear 1
865 > > Lever, cocking 1
866 > > Pin, cocking lever 1
867 > > Lock, accelerator stop 1
868 > > Stop, spring, firing pin 1
870 > Rod assembly, driving spring 1
E1 Extractor 1
E2 Firing pin assembly 1
E3 Firing pin extension body 1
Maintenance manual
- 43 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
870
831
865
863
823 c
e
d
III
840 II
V
YY
YY-
ZZ
844 867
862
R
L
VII
843 E1 IV e
d
864 VI
f VIII
868 c I
842 820
E2
866
a 853 850
861
852
b
b
a
E3
810
800
Maintenance manual
- 44 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.5. Bolt group [ 5 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The bolt group [ 5 ] (catalog number (800)) controls the cartridge feeding, extraction and
ejection operations as well as the operation of the firing pin (861) and consists of the bolt
assembly (810) and the driving spring assembly (870).
For more information about the operation of the bolt group [ 5 ] and its different components,
refer to chapter 3.
The bolt assembly (810) consists of the bolt (820) (including the pin (823)) onto or into
which the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The extractor/ejector assembly (840) which fits, with its hinge pin, into its housing in the
left side of the bolt (820)
The extractor/ejector assembly (840) consists of the extractor (E1) and the ejector (842).
The ejector (842), held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its spring (843), is
secured to the front end of the extractor (E1) by means of the pin (844).
The front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) is guided by the extractor switch
(3836) (provided on the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver (3100) (also refer
to § 2.2.2.2)), by a special cam riveted to the inner side of the left side plate of the
receiver and by the extractor spring (476) and the extractor guide cam in the feed cover
(D1) (also refer to § 2.2.4).
- The bolt switch (831) which fits, from above, into its opening in the bolt (820)
The bolt switch (831) is used to complete the appropriate groove for the rear end of the belt
feed lever (471) (also refer to § 2.2.4) on top of the bolt assembly (810).
In the standard case of a left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, the groove of the
bolt switch (831) should face the inscription ‘L’ on the upper side of the bolt (820) in order
to obtain a continuous groove.
In case of a right-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, the groove of the bolt switch
(831) should face the inscription ‘R’ on the upper side of the bolt (820) in order to obtain
a continuous groove.
The correct positioning of the bolt switch (831) is ensured by the pin (823) (part of the bolt
(820)) which engages the corresponding hole in the bolt switch.
The bolt switch (831) itself is held in place in the bolt (820) by the hinge pin of the extractor/
ejector assembly (840).
- The firing pin assembly (E2) which fits, from the rear side, into its housing in the bolt
(820) and which is held back by the sear (863)
The firing pin assembly (E2) consists of the firing pin (861) fitted onto the front end of the
firing pin extension (850).
The firing pin extension (850) consists of the firing pin extension body (E3) into which the
firing pin spring (852) has been fitted and secured by means of the pin (853).
Maintenance manual
- 45 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
870
831
865
863
823 c
e
d
III
840 II
V
YY
YY-
ZZ
844 867
862
R
L
VII
843 E1 IV e
d
864 VI
f VIII
868 c I
842 820
E2
866
a 853 850
861
852
b
b
a
E3
810
800
Maintenance manual
- 46 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.5. Bolt group [ 5 ] (continued)
- The sear (863) which fits, together with its spring (862) and from above, into its
housing in the rear part of the bolt (820)
The sear (863) is held in its raised position by means of its spring (862) and is secured by the
engagement of the notch (I) of the sear slide (864) onto its lug (II).
The sear (863), which is pushed down by the front end of the trigger bar (3846) (also refer to
§ 2.2.2.2) when the trigger (641) (also refer to § 2.2.9) is pushed down, is used to hold the
firing pin assembly (E2) back at its cocked position and to release it for the firing operation.
- The cocking lever (865) and its pin (866)
The cocking lever (865) fits into position in its housing provided in the upper rear part of the
bolt (820) and is secured by and can pivot around its pin (866).
The cocking lever pin (866) is inserted, from the left side, into its hole in the bolt (820) and
through the hole in the cocking lever (865).
The position of the cocking lever (865), which is used to push the firing pin assembly (E2)
into its cocked position, is determined by the engagement of its tip into the recess provided in
the inner upper rear part of the receiver (3100).
- The firing pin spring stop (868) which fits, from underneath, into the bolt (820) and
which is secured by the lock (867)
The firing pin spring stop (868) is used to hold back the rear end of the firing pin spring
(852) when the firing pin assembly (E2) is cocked.
The lock (867) secures the firing pin spring stop (868) into position by the engagement of its
fork-shaped front end (III) onto the recess (IV) in the upper end of the stop.
Besides the housings, grooves and holes described above, the bolt (820) has also been
provided with the following ones :
- The T-slot (V) on its front face for holding the cartridge and extracting the cartridge case
- The firing pin hole (not visible on Fig. 2.f) in its front face which allows the firing pin
(861) to reach the primer of the cartridge
- The engagement groove (VI) in its upper rear part for the engagement of the bolt latch
(3838) when the bolt (820) is at its rear position
- The housing (VII) for the driving spring assembly (870) in its rear upper right part
- The holes (VIII) (on the left and right sides) for the bolt stud (725) (also refer to § 2.2.8)
in its lower rear part
Maintenance manual
- 47 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
e
523
528
520 e
I
529 525
d
II
526 524
d
522 527
548
a
521 545
c
551
547
b
546
a
510
3654
(Fig. 2.c.2)
542 b
c 543
541 544
549
500
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
3653
(Fig. 2.c.2)
Fig. 2.g - Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*)
Maintenance manual
- 48 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.6. Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.g)
500 Sight assembly, rear (meters) 1

510 > Base assembly, rear sight 1
520 > Leaf assembly, rear sight 1
521 > > Leaf, rear sight 3 1
522 > > Slide, rear sight 1
523 > > Knob, elevating screw 1
524 > > Screw, elevating, rear sight slide 1
525 > > Pin rear sight, elevating knob 1
526 > > Pin, retainer, rear sight, elevating screw 1
527 > > Nut, half, rear sight 1
528 > > Plunger, elevating, rear sight 1
529 > > Spring, plunger, elevating, rear sight 1
541 > Knob, rear sight, windage screw 1
542 > Pin, knob, windage screw 1
543 > Plunger, rear sight, windage click 1
544 > Spring, windage click 1
545 > Adjusting screw, windage, rear sight 1
546 > Stop, rear sight leaf 1
547 > Scale, windage, rear sight 1
548 > Screw, scale, rear sight 2
549 > Spring, rear sight base 1
551 > Screw, sight base 2
(b) Description
The rear sight group [ 6 ] (catalog number (500)) has been provided on the upper rear
part of the receiver (3100).
The front part of the rear sight group [ 6 ] is secured by the 2 screws (551) which are part of the
rear sight group.
The rear part of the rear sight group [ 6 ] is fixed by the separate screw (3654) which is also
used to secure the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) to the inner upper rear part of the receiver
(3100) (also refer to § 2.2.2.2).
The bottom of the rear sight group [ 6 ] has been provided with 2 positioning pins which engage
the corresponding holes in the upper plate of the receiver (3100).
group [ 6 ] is replaced by the rear sight assembly (1500/1) (also refer to § 13.1).
Maintenance manual
- 49 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
e
523
528
520 e
I
529 525
d
II
526 524
d
522 527
548
a
521 545
c
551
547
b
546
a
510
3654
(Fig. 2.c.2)
542 b
c 543
541 544
549
500
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
3653
(Fig. 2.c.2)
Fig. 2.g - Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*)
Maintenance manual
- 50 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.6. Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*) (continued)
The rear sight assembly (500) consists of the rear sight base (510) onto which the
following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The rear sight leaf assembly (520) which is secured by and can pivot on the rear sight
windage adjusting screw (545)
The rear sight leaf assembly (520) consists of the rear sight leaf (521) with a graduated
rectangular opening into which the rear sight slide (522) is fitted.
The rear sight slide (522) is secured into the rectangular opening of the rear sight leaf (521)
by means of the rear sight half nut (527) which is inserted into both the rear sight leaf and
the slide from the right side.
The teeth on the right side of the rear sight half nut (527) engage the thread of the rear
sight slide elevating screw (524) so that the half nut, and therefore also the rear sight slide
(522), move along the graduated rectangular opening when the screw is turned.
The rear sight slide elevating screw (524) fits into its housing in the right part of the rear sight
leaf (521) and is held into position by the pin (526) which engages the recess (I) in the screw.
The rear sight slide elevating screw (524) can be turned by using the rear sight slide elevating
knob (523) which is fixed to the screw by means of the pin (525) and which is used in
combination with the elevating plunger (528) and its spring (529).
The elevating plunger (528) and its spring (529), fitted into their housing (II) in the top of
the rear sight leaf (521), allow a precise positioning of the rear sight slide elevating knob
(523) by generating a click each time the knob is rotated by 60°.
The rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) is screwed, from the right side, through the rear
sight leaf stop (546), the rear sight base (510) and the rear sight leaf assembly (520).
The lateral position of the rear sight leaf assembly (520) can be modified by turning the
rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) by using the rear sight windage knob (541). This
knob is fixed to the left end of the screw by means of the pin (542) and is used in
combination with the windage click plunger (543) and its spring (544).
The windage click plunger (543) and its spring (544), fitted into their housing in the rear
sight windage knob (541), allow a precise positioning of the knob by generating a click
each time the knob is rotated by 90°.
For more information about the positioning of the rear sight leaf assembly (520), refer to
§ 6.1.
- The rear sight windage scale (547) which is fixed to the rear sight base (510) by means
of the 2 screws (548)
- The rear sight base spring (549) which ensures that the rear sight leaf assembly (520) is
correctly maintained at its lowered and raised positions
- The 2 screws (551) which are used to secure the front part of the rear sight base (510)
to the upper rear part of the receiver (3100) (see above)
Maintenance manual
- 51 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
201
(Fig. 2.d)
913 912
b
c
b 910
962 a
G1
c
a 961
912
950
940
963
G2
930 922
d
921
925
920
924
900
Fig. 2.h - Buffer group [ 7 ]
Maintenance manual
- 52 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.7. Buffer group [ 7 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.h)
900 Body, oil buffer 1

910 > Body, barrel buffer, assembly 1
912 > > Depressor, breech lock 2
913 > > Rivet, solid, depressors 2
961 > > Lock, buffer body 1
920 > Buffer, barrel, assembly n°3 1
921 > > Tube, barrel buffer 1
922 > > Split pin 1
924 > > Head, buffer piston 1
925 > > Cap, buffer tube 1
930 > > Rod, oil buffer piston 1
940 > > Guide, buffer spring assembly 1
963 > > Spring, guide, buffer 1
950 > Pin assembly, accelerator 1
962 > Accelerator, buffer 1
G1 Buffer body 1
G2 Buffer piston assembly 1
(b) Description
The buffer group [ 7 ] (catalog number (900)) is located behind the barrel extension group
[ 3 ] and absorbs the recoil energy of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and the barrel extension
group during their rearward movement.
The accelerator (962) and the buffer piston rod (930) ensure the correct locking with the barrel
extension group [ 3 ] (also refer to § 2.2.3).
The front nose of the buffer piston rod (930) engages the rear nose of the rear shank of the
barrel extension body (C1).
At the end of the rearward movement, the 2 claws of the accelerator (962) engage the
narrower part of the rear shank of the barrel extension body (C1).
Maintenance manual
- 53 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
201
(Fig. 2.d)
913 912
b
c
b 910
962 a
G1
c
a 961
912
950
940
963
G2
930 922
d
921
925
920
924
900
Fig. 2.h - Buffer group [ 7 ]
Maintenance manual
- 54 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.7. Buffer group [ 7 ] (continued)
The buffer group (900) consists of the buffer body assembly (910) onto or into which the
following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The barrel buffer assembly (920) which has been inserted, from the rear side, into the
hollow rear part of the buffer body assembly (910)
The barrel buffer assembly (920) consists of the buffer piston assembly (G2), the barrel
buffer tube (921), the buffer spring guide (940) and the buffer spring (963).
The buffer piston assembly (G2) consists of the buffer piston rod (930) provided, on its
rear end, with the buffer tube cap (925) and the buffer piston head (924).
The buffer tube cap (925) is just fitted (without screwing) onto the rear end of the buffer
piston rod (930) while the buffer piston head (924) is screwed onto it and secured by
means of the split pin (922).
A special piston head checking gauge (1682) has been provided to determine the
correct position of the buffer piston head (924) on the buffer piston rod (930) (also
refer to § 9.7.4).
The rear end of the buffer piston assembly (G2) is screwed, by the buffer tube cap (925),
into the barrel buffer tube (921).
The buffer spring (963) is fitted onto the front end of the buffer piston assembly (G2) and
held in place by means of the buffer spring guide (940) which is held back by the
protruding pins at the front end of the buffer piston rod (930).
- The accelerator (962) which is secured by and can pivot around its pin (950)
The accelerator (962) fits between the breech lock depressors (912) at the front side of the
buffer body assembly (910).
The buffer body assembly (910) consists of the buffer body (G1) onto which the following
components have been installed :
- The 2 breech lock depressors (912) which have been fixed by means of the 2 rivets
(913)
When, at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the left and right
extremities of the breech lock pin (230) (also refer to § 2.2.3) come into contact with the
inclined face of the front extremity of the corresponding breech lock depressor (912), the pin,
and therefore also the breech lock (221) itself, will be pushed downwards.
- The buffer body lock (961)
The buffer body lock (961) is fitted, from the rear side, into its housing in the right side of the
buffer body (G1).
The rear end of the buffer body lock (961) slightly protrudes towards the right side and is
used to hold back the moving parts once they have been inserted into the receiver (3100).
Maintenance manual
- 55 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
c 735
723
g g
722 730
a
719
728
726 717
717 713
b d
719
721
c 717
II 719
716/1 715
728
III
711
e
700 727
f
735
H2
724
712
d
714
I
H1
a
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) e
718
f
725
Fig. 2.i - Cocking handle group [ 8 ]
Maintenance manual
- 56 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.8. Cocking handle group [ 8 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.i)
700 Slide assembly, retracting (spring to RH) 1

711 > Bracket, retracting slide 1
712 > Slide, retracting 1
713 > Lever, retracting slide 1
714 > Stud, lever, retracting slide 1
715 > Washer, retracting slide lever stud 1
716/1 > Spring, helical torsion 1
717 > Nut, stud, shoulder bolt 3
718 > Bolt, shoulder, bracket, retracting slide 2
719 > Split pin 3
721 > Plunger, retracting slide 1
722 > Spring, plunger, retracting slide 1
723 > Pin, plunger, retracting slide 1
724 > Pin, stop, retracting slide 1
725 > Stud, bolt 1
726 > Stud, retracting slide 1
727 > Screw, retracting slide bracket (short) 1
728 > Screw, retracting slide bracket (long) 2
730 > Handle, retracting slide assembly 1
735 > Wire 2
H1 Cocking handle assembly 1

H2 Cocking slide assembly 1
Maintenance manual
- 57 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
c 735
723
g g
722 730
a
719
728
726 717
717 713
b d
719
721
c 717
II 719
716/1 715
728
III
711
e
700 727
f
735
H2
724
712
d
714
I
H1
a
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) e
718
f
725
Maintenance manual
- 58 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.8. Cocking handle group [ 8 ] (continued)
(b) Description
Please note that the configuration described and illustrated in this paragraph corresponds to the
standard case of a right-hand mounted cocking handle group [ 8 ] : the differences resulting
from the installation of the group at the left side of the machine gun (also refer to § 12.2), will be
mentioned when necessary.
The cocking handle group [ 8 ] (catalog number (700)) allows pulling the moving parts
manually towards their rear position.
The cocking handle group [ 8 ] consists of the cocking handle assembly (H1), the bolt stud
(725) and the components required to fix the cocking handle assembly onto the right
(standard configuration) or left side of the receiver (3100).
The bolt stud (725) fits into the right (standard configuration) or left hole in the lower rear part of
the bolt (820) (also refer to § 2.2.5) and is engaged by the notch (I) on the rear end of the
cocking slide (712) when the cocking handle (730) is pulled rearwards.
The cocking handle assembly (H1) is fixed to the receiver (3100) by means of the 2 shoulder
bolts (718), the screw (727) and the 2 screws (728).
The 2 shoulder bolts (718) are installed from the inside of the receiver (3100) and each
shoulder bolt is secured by a nut (717) which, on its turn, is secured to the outer extremity of
the bolt by means of a split pin (719).
The screw (727) (used at the lower rear side) is slightly shorter than the 2 screws (728).
The 2 rear screws (the screw (727) and one of the screws (728)) are secured by one of the
wires (735).
The other wire (735) is used to secure the remaining screw (728) and the cocking slide stud
(726).
NOTE : In case of a left-hand mounted cocking handle group [ 8 ], the same cocking
slide bracket (711) is used, but the bracket is turned upside down in order to
allow its correct installation on the left side of the receiver (3100) (also refer to
§ 12.2).
The cocking handle assembly (H1) consists of the cocking slide bracket (711) onto which
the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The cocking slide assembly (H2) which is fitted between the cocking slide bracket (711)
and the receiver (3100) and which slides along the slot in the bracket
The cocking slide assembly (H2) consists of the cocking slide (712) onto which the cocking
slide stop pin (724) and the cocking slide lever stud (714) have been screwed.
The cocking slide stop pin (724) has been provided to accept the loop (II) of the cocking
handle spring (716/1) / (716/2) and to stop the forward movement of the cocking slide
lever (713).
The cocking slide lever stud (714) is used for the installation of the cocking handle spring
(716/1) / (716/2) and the assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the
cocking handle (730).
Maintenance manual
- 59 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
c 735
723
g g
722 730
a
719
728
726 717
717 713
b d
719
721
c 717
II 719
716/1 715
728
III
711
e
700 727
f
735
H2
724
712
d
714
I
H1
a
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) e
718
f
725
Maintenance manual
- 60 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.8. Cocking handle group [ 8 ] (continued)
- The assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730)
The assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730) is
mounted, together with the cocking handle spring (716/1) and the washer (715), onto the
outer end of the cocking slide lever stud (714).
The assembly is secured by a nut (717) which, on its turn, is secured to the outer extremity
of the cocking slide lever stud (714) by means of a split pin (719).
The cocking handle spring (716/1) is installed between the cocking slide lever (713) and
the shoulder of the cocking slide lever stud (714).
The loop (II) of the cocking handle spring (716/1) fits onto the cocking slide stop pin
(724) while the bent extremity (III) of the spring fits into a small hole provided in the
cocking slide lever (713).
Please note that, in case of a left-hand mounted cocking handle group [ 8 ] (also refer to
§ 12.2), the cocking handle (730) is mounted on the other side of the cocking slide lever
(713) while the cocking handle spring (716/1) is replaced by the cocking handle spring
(716/2).
- The cocking slide stud (726) which is screwed into the lower front threaded hole of the
cocking slide bracket (711)
The cocking slide stud (726) is used as a support in order to facilitate the initiation of the
pivoting movement of the cocking slide lever (713) when the cocking handle (730) is pulled
rearwards.
The cocking slide lever (713) is forced back forwards by the cocking handle spring
(716/1) / (716/2).
As described above, the cocking slide stud (726) is secured, together with the closest screw
(728), by means of one of the wires (735).
- The cocking slide plunger (721) and its spring (722)
The cocking slide plunger (721) and its spring (722) fit, from above, into their housing in the
upper front side of the cocking slide bracket (711) and are held in place by the pin (723).
Please note that, in case of a left-hand mounted cocking handle group [ 8 ] (also refer to
§ 12.2), the cocking slide bracket (711) is installed upside down so that the housing for
the cocking slide plunger (721) and its spring (722) is at the lower side.
When the cocking slide (712) is at its most forward position, the cocking slide plunger (721)
engages the V-notch in the slide so that the slide, and therefore also the cocking handle
(730), is held in place.
Maintenance manual
- 61 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
633
600
a
633
610 643
641
614 643 631
612
h
b
a
660
639
668 632
666
b 667
V
II VI 637
i
IV 638
642 d 634 III
c
23 x 635
614 h
g
636
614
647
e
i I
613
631 620
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) f
633
c
649
646
e
644
d
633
f
648
615
g
632
Fig. 2.j - Back plate group [ 9 ]
Maintenance manual
- 62 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.9. Back plate group [ 9 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.j)
600 Plate assembly, back, spade grip 1

610 > Plate assembly, back 1
612 > > Upper arm, handle 1 (°)
613 > > Lower arm, handle 1 (°)
614 > > Rivet, handle frame 4 (°)
615 > Pin, locking 1
620 > Sleeve, buffer tube assembly 1
631 > Tube, handle grip, plate assembly back 2
632 > Grip, handle, plastic 2
633 > Screw, handle tube 4
634 > Plate, buffer 1
635 > Disk, buffer, fiber 23
636 > Screw, adjusting, buffer disk 1
637 > Plunger, adjusting screw 1
638 > Spring, plunger, adjusting 1
639 > Release, bolt latch 1
641 > Trigger 1
642 > Pin, trigger axis 2
643 > Spring, compression, trigger 2
644 > Lock, back plate latch 1
646 > Spring, back plate latch lock 1
647 > Pin, axis, lock, back plate 1
648 > Latch, back plate 1
649 > Spring, back plate latch 1
660 > Safety assembly 1
666 > > Slotted cheese head screw 1
667 > > Hexagonal nut, style 1 1
668 > Hexagonal socket screw 2
(°) Although these components are available as spare parts, they are not discussed in the
present maintenance manual : more information about their removal and/or
replacement and the required tools is only available on special request.
(b) Description
The back plate group [ 9 ] (catalog number (600)), mounted onto the rear part of the
receiver (3100), is used to stop the bolt assembly (810) at the end of its rearward
movement and to absorb its remaining recoil energy.
In addition, the back plate group [ 9 ] has been provided with 2 handle grips and with the
components allowing the operator to control the firing operation of the machine gun.
Maintenance manual
- 63 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
633
600
a
633
610 643
641
614 643 631
612
h
b
a
660
639
668 632
666
b 667
V
II VI 637
i
IV 638
642 d 634 III
c
23 x 635
614 h
g
636
614
647
e
i I
613
631 620
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) f
633
c
649
646
e
644
d
633
f
648
615
g
632
Maintenance manual
- 64 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.9. Back plate group [ 9 ] (continued)
The back plate assembly (600) consists of the back plate subassembly (610) onto or into
which the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The buffer tube sleeve (620) which is fitted, from the rear side, onto the buffer tube of
the back plate subassembly (610)
The buffer tube sleeve (620) is held into position on the buffer tube of the back plate
subassembly (610) by the engagement of its stud (I) into the groove (II) in the buffer tube.
The lock (III) of the buffer tube sleeve (620) can be used to lock the bolt latch release (639)
at its lower position for automatic firing.
- The left and right handle grips (632) and their tubes (631)
Each handle grip (632) is secured, together with its tube (631), between the corresponding
extremities of the upper and lower handle arms (612) and (613) by means of 2 screws (633).
- The buffer plate (634) and the fiber buffer disks (635) provided inside the buffer tube of
the back plate subassembly (610)
These absorbing components are held in place by the buffer disks screw (636) used in
combination with the plunger (637).
The plunger (637) fits, together with its spring (638), into its housing (IV) in the buffer disks
screw (636). The outer extremity of the plunger (637) engages one of the 2 grooves in the
inner thread of the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly (610) in order to avoid that
the buffer disks screw is loosened due to vibrations.
The number of fiber buffer disks (635) (normally ‘23’) is determined so that the buffer disks
screw (636) protrudes by 0 - 3.3 mm from the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly
(610) when a torque of 40.7 ± 13.5 Nm is applied to it (also refer to § 9.9.2).
- The bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) which are secured by and can pivot
around a pin (642)
The bolt latch release (639) is located at the left side of the trigger (641) and both
components are fitted together, from the rear side, into the upper opening (V) in the back
plate subassembly (610).
Both the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) are held in position by a spring (643).
The lower extremity of a spring (643) engages its housing in the bolt latch release (639) /
the trigger (641) while the upper extremity of the spring engages the corresponding recess
provided in the back plate subassembly (610).
The front ends of both the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) protrude from the
front side of the back plate subassembly (610) (and therefore into the receiver (3100) when
the back plate assembly (600) is installed onto the machine gun).
The front end of the bolt latch release (639) is used to actuate the bolt latch (3838) (also
refer to § 2.2.2.2).
The front end of the trigger (641) is used to actuate the trigger bar (3846) (also refer to
§ 2.2.2.2).
Maintenance manual
- 65 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
633
600
a
633
610 643
641
614 643 631
612
h
b
a
660
639
668 632
666
b 667
V
II VI 637
i
IV 638
642 d 634 III
c
23 x 635
614 h
g
636
614
647
e
i I
613
631 620
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1) f
633
c
649
646
e
644
d
633
f
648
615
g
632
Maintenance manual
- 66 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.2.9. Back plate group [ 9 ] (continued)
- The back plate latch (648) which is secured by and can pivot around a pin (642)
The back plate latch (648), which is used to lock the back plate assembly (600) into position
on the rear side of the receiver (3100), is held in position by its spring (649).
The lower extremity of the back plate latch spring (649) engages its housing in the back
plate latch (648) while the upper extremity of the spring engages the corresponding recess
provided underneath the lower handle arm (613).
- The back plate latch lock (644) which is secured by and can pivot around the pin (647)
which, on its turn, is secured by means of the locking pin (615)
The back plate latch lock (644) (with its inner spring (646)) is used to lock the back plate
latch (648) so that it becomes impossible to accidentally release the back plate assembly
(600) by inadvertently moving the back plate latch.
- The safety assembly (660) which can be used to block the trigger (641) and which is
fixed to the back plate subassembly (610) by means of the 2 screws (668)
The trigger (641) is blocked when the safety catch (VI) is turned inwards so that the screw
(666) is positioned under the trigger.
When the screw (666) is installed correctly, it can be locked into position by using the
hexagonal nut (667).
When the safety catch (VI) is turned outwards, the trigger (641) is no longer blocked into
position : a red warning dot will become visible.
Maintenance manual
- 67 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Maintenance manual
- 68 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 3 : OPERATING PRINCIPLES
3.1. EMPTY MACHINE GUN IN THE INITIAL CONDITION
The initial condition of the machine gun is obtained after having carried out the unloading
procedure (refer to § 6.4) and/or after having carried out the safety checks (refer to § 4.2).
The functional parts of the machine gun are in the neutral position.
3.2. LOADING AND COCKING THE MACHINE GUN
Proceed as described in § 6.2.
When the machine gun is cocked, the bolt (820) is at its front position and the sear (863) holds
back the firing pin assembly (E2) at its cocked position.
3.3. FIRING THE MACHINE GUN
When firing the machine gun, the recoil force of the cartridge case causes the moving parts to
be moved rearwards, compressing the driving spring assembly (870).
In order to simplify the description of the several operations which take place simultaneously
when firing the machine gun, the following operations will be described separately :
• The operation of the moving parts (refer to § 3.3.1) :
- Unlocking the bolt (820) at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving
parts
- The operation of the accelerator (962) during the rearward movement of the moving
parts
- Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts
- The forward movement of the moving parts
- Locking the bolt (820) at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts
• The feeding operation (refer to § 3.3.2) :
- Feeding the ammunition belt into the machine gun
- Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the cartridge into the
chamber
- Extraction from the chamber and ejection of a cartridge case
• The firing operation (refer to § 3.3.3) :
- The cocking operation
- The firing operation
Maintenance manual
- 69 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1
820 221
200
3816
2 110
110/1
912
3 230 900
820
Fig. 3.a - Unlocking the bolt (820) at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts
Maintenance manual
- 70 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3. FIRING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts
The moving parts of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun are the barrel extension group [ 3 ], the
bolt group [ 5 ] and the buffer group [ 7 ].
(a) Unlocking the bolt (820) at the beginning of the rearward movement of
the moving parts (Fig. 3.a)
Just before the firing operation, the bolt (820) is locked to the barrel extension assembly
(200) by means of the breech lock (221) (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.a).
The breech lock (221) is held upwards by means of the breech lock cam (3816) provided on the
bottom of the receiver (3100).
At the instant of firing, the recoil force of the cartridge case causes the moving parts to be
moved rearwards (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.a).
After the moving parts have moved approx. 20 mm rearwards, the breech lock pin (230),
which holds the breech lock (221) in position in the barrel extension assembly (200),
comes into contact with the inclined face of the front extremities of the breech lock
depressors (912) of the buffer group (900) (part ‘2’ of Fig. 3.a).
As a result, the breech lock pin (230), and therefore also the breech lock (221), will be
pushed downwards resulting in the unlocking of the bolt (820).
When the bolt (820) is unlocked, the assembly formed by the barrel (110) / (110/1) and
the barrel extension assembly (200) is no longer linked to the bolt.
This causes the bolt (820) to continue its rearward movement while the movement of the
assembly formed by the barrel (110) / (110/1) and the barrel extension assembly (200) is
absorbed and stopped by the buffer spring (963) (part of the buffer group (900)) (part ‘3’
of Fig. 3.a).
Maintenance manual
- 71 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
110
110/1 820
962
b
950
200
A
A' > A
B
B' >> B
Fig. 3.b - The operation of the accelerator (962) during the rearward movement of the moving parts
962 820 23 x 635
634
C1 G2 963
930
Fig. 3.c - Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts
Maintenance manual
- 72 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts (continued)
(b) The operation of the accelerator (962) during the rearward movement of
the moving parts (Fig. 3.b)
During its rearward movement, the rear side of the barrel extension assembly (200) comes
into contact with the front side of the accelerator (962) which is secured by and pivots on
its pin (950).
The contact with the rear side of the barrel extension assembly (200) causes the
accelerator (962) to start rotating towards the rear side.
During a part of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the nose of the accelerator (962)
fits into the housing (b) in the bottom of the bolt (820) : the energy of the rotating accelerator
will therefore be transferred to the bolt.
As long as the barrel extension assembly (200) continues moving rearwards, the contact
point (c) between the rear side of the barrel extension assembly and the front side of the
accelerator (962) moves downwards resulting in a faster and faster rearward movement of
the nose of the accelerator.
This causes the rearward movement of the bolt (820) to be accelerated until the
accelerator (962) is turned so far that its nose is released from the housing (b) in the
bottom of the bolt : the latter will then continue its faster rearward movement until the
movement is absorbed and halted by the buffer plate (634) of the back plate assembly
(600).
After its nose has been released from the housing (b) in the bottom of the bolt (820), the
accelerator (962) continues rotating until its claws lock the rear nose of the rear shank of the
barrel extension body (C1) to the front nose of the buffer piston rod (930) causing the barrel
extension assembly (200) to be locked to the buffer group (900) (also refer to Fig. 3.c).
(c) Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts (Fig. 3.c)
The rearward movement of the assembly formed by the barrel (110) / (110/1) and the
barrel extension assembly (200) is absorbed and halted by the buffer piston assembly
(G2), used in combination with the buffer spring (963).
The rearward movement of the bolt (820) is absorbed and halted by the buffer plate
(634), used in combination with the fiber buffer disks (635).
Maintenance manual
- 73 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
820 870
634
b
200
962
963
Fig. 3.d - The forward movement of the moving parts
820 221
a
3816
200
230
Fig. 3.e - Locking the bolt (820) at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts
Maintenance manual
- 74 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts (continued)
(d) The forward movement of the moving parts (Fig. 3.d)
The impact of the bolt (820) on the buffer plate (634) is partly buffered by the fiber buffer
disks (635) while the remaining energy produced by the shock is returned to the bolt.
This energy, combined with the energy of the compressed driving spring assembly (870),
forces the bolt (820) to return forwards.
During the forward movement of the bolt (820), the rear edge of the housing (b) in its
bottom comes into contact with the nose of the accelerator (962) so that the latter is
pushed back forwards and therefore unlocks the rear nose of the rear shank of the barrel
extension body (C1) from the front nose of the buffer piston rod (930).
Once the rear nose of the rear shank of the barrel extension body (C1) is unlocked from
the front nose of the buffer piston rod (930), the assembly formed by the barrel (110) /
(110/1) and the barrel extension assembly (200) is forced to return forwards by the
compressed buffer spring (963).
(e) Locking the bolt (820) at the end of the forward movement of the moving
parts (Fig. 3.e)
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the front bottom part of the breech
lock (221) comes into contact with the inclined rear face of the protruding part (a) on top
of the breech lock cam (3816).
As a result, the breech lock (221) will be forced to engage the recess provided in the
bottom of the bolt (820).
When, approx. 15 mm before the end of the forward movement of the moving parts, the
breech lock (221) is fully engaged in the recess in the bottom of the bolt (820), the latter is
said to be ‘locked’ to the barrel extension assembly (200).
When the moving parts reach their most forward position, the next cartridge can be fired.
Maintenance manual
- 75 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
471 a 810
D2
b
478
430
c
3600
During the rearward movement of the moving parts
D2
471
477
430 3828
3500
During the forward movement of the moving parts
Fig. 3.f - Feeding the ammunition belt into a left-hand fed machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 76 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3.2. The feeding operation
(a) Feeding the ammunition belt into the machine gun (Fig. 3.f)
During the rearward movement of the moving parts and in case a cartridge is present at the
‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed tray of the receiver (3100), this cartridge will be
extracted from the ammunition belt as described in § 3.3.2 (b).
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the rear end of the belt feed lever
(471) moves in the groove (a) on top of the bolt assembly (810) : this causes the belt feed
lever to pivot on its mounting pin (b) so that its front end moves towards the left side.
As a result, the belt feed slide assembly (D2), which is actuated by the front end of the belt
feed lever (471), is moved towards the left side so that the belt feed pawl (430) is forced
to engage the next cartridge (c).
The belt feed pawl (430) is first compressed, forced to pass over the next cartridge (c) and then
engaged, by the force of the pawl spring (478), against the left side of the cartridge.
During this operation, the ammunition belt is held back by the belt holding pawls assembly
(3600).
Please note that this operation corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed
§ 12.1), the ‘rear right --> front left’ groove on top of the bolt assembly (810) will be used
while, during the rearward movement of the moving parts, the front end of the belt feed lever
(471) forces the belt feed slide assembly (D2) to move towards the right side.
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the front end of the belt feed lever
(471) forces the belt feed slide assembly (D2) to move back towards the right (left-hand
feed) / left (right-hand feed) side.
As a result, the belt feed pawl (430) pushes the next cartridge (c), and therefore also the
whole ammunition belt, laterally until the cartridge is correctly positioned at the
‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed tray of the receiver (3100).
For the standard case of a left-hand fed machine gun, this ‘ammunition extraction’ position is at
the right side of the feed tray and obtained by full contact between the cartridge and both the
front cartridge stop (3828) and the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500).
If the gun is converted to right-hand feeding, the ‘ammunition extraction’ position is at the left
side of the feed tray and obtained by full contact between the cartridge and the front cartridge
stop (3828), the link stripper (3829) and the rear cartridge stop (3830).
In order to obtain a correct positioning of the cartridge, the latter is held into contact with the
feed tray itself by the belt feed pawl arm (477).
Maintenance manual
- 77 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
D1 476
840
1
820
2
D1 a
3
4 b 820
3836
c
d 842
5 e
840
110
110/1
Fig. 3.g - Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the cartridge into the chamber
Maintenance manual
- 78 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3.2. The feeding operation (continued)
(b) Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the
cartridge into the chamber (Fig. 3.g)
When the bolt (820) is at its most forward position, the extractor spring (476) forces the
front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) to engage the rim of the cartridge
presently positioned at the ‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed tray of the receiver
(3100) (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.g).
The extractor spring (476) is mounted inside the feed cover (D1) while the extractor/ejector
assembly (840) has been provided on the left side of the bolt (820).
For more information about the ‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed tray of the receiver
(3100), refer to § 3.3.2 (a).
At the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the extractor/ejector
assembly (840) extracts the cartridge from the link (part ‘2’ of Fig. 3.g).
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the front end of the extractor/ejector
assembly (840) is progressively forced down by the extractor guide cam (a) (part of the
feed cover (D1)) so that the rim of the extracted cartridge is fitted into the T-slot (b) for the
cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820) (part ‘3’ of Fig. 3.g).
When the moving parts start their forward movement, the guide lug (c) on the left side of
the front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) is in contact with the lower rear
inclined face of the extractor switch (3836) : the front end of the extractor/ejector
assembly is pushed fully downwards so that the cartridge is aligned with the axis of the
barrel (110) / (110/1) and the cartridge case (d) of the previously fired cartridge is ejected
(part ‘4’ of Fig. 3.g).
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the cartridge is progressively inserted
into the chamber (part ‘5’ of Fig. 3.g).
When, during this forward movement of the moving parts, the guide lug (c) on the front
end of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) comes into contact with the inclined face of
the front extractor cam (e) provided inside the receiver (3100), the front end of the
extractor/ejector assembly is forced to move back upwards (part ‘5’ of Fig. 3.g).
(c) Extraction from the chamber and ejection of the cartridge case
As it is fitted with its rim into the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820),
the cartridge case of the fired cartridge is extracted from the chamber during the rearward
movement of the moving parts.
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the cartridge case will then be pushed
downwards along the T-slot and ejected when the next cartridge is aligned with the axis of
the barrel (110) / (110/1) (also refer to part ‘4’ of Fig. 3.g).
The last cartridge case (when there is no next cartridge in the T-slot) will be ejected by the
ejector (842) of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) when the latter is pushed fully
downwards by its contact with the lower rear inclined face of the extractor switch (3836).
Maintenance manual
- 79 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
865
863
E2
Fig. 3.h - The cocking operation
3846
110
820 865
110/1
863
221 D2
3846 641
3700
863
E2
Fig. 3.i - Firing
Maintenance manual
- 80 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3.3.3. The firing operation
(a) The cocking operation (Fig. 3.h)
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the firing pin assembly (E2) is pushed,
against the force of the firing pin spring (852), rearwards by the lower end of the cocking
lever (865) until it is engaged by the sear (863).
The position of the cocking lever (865) is determined by the engagement of its tip into the recess
(a) provided in the mounting bracket which has been fixed to the inner side of the top plate of
the receiver (3100).
(b) Firing (Fig. 3.i)
When the moving parts are at their most forward position, the sear (863) comes into
contact with the front end of the trigger bar (3846).
When the trigger (641) is pushed down, its front end forces the rear end of the trigger bar
(3846) to move upwards so that the front end of the trigger bar moves downwards and
presses on the sear (863).
The trigger bar (3846) pivots on its pin (3700).
The upper limit position of the rear end of the trigger bar (3846) is determined by the position of
the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) which is adjusted during the adjustment of the timing
(also refer to § 10.5).
As a result, the sear (863) moves downwards, against the force of its spring (862), and
releases the firing pin assembly (E2) which is propelled forwards by the force of the firing
pin spring (852) : percussion takes place and the cartridge is fired.
For more information about the 2 possible firing modes of the machine gun (single-shot and
automatic), refer to § 6.3.
NOTE : The firing can only be initiated if the bolt (820) is positioned at its most forward
position.
Maintenance manual
- 81 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
639 b
.
639
)
641 620
a
Fig. 4.a - Blocking the trigger (641) by means of Fig. 4.b - Unlocking the bolt latch release (639)
the safety catch (a) (if necessary)
(bolt latch release (639) unlocked and raised)
D1 D1
c
3100
440 3100
Fig. 4.c - Checking if the feed tray (c) is empty
d
.
.
820
730
Fig. 4.d - Pulling the cocking handle (730) Fig. 4.e - Checking if the chamber (d) and the
completely rearwards and then pushing it back front face of the bolt (820) are clear
forwards
Maintenance manual
- 82 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 4 : SAFETY INFORMATION
4.1. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following instructions should be read before loading and firing the weapon and before any
intervention (disassembly, maintenance, ...) on it :
x The MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun can cause injury or death up to 6800 metres.
x Always handle the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, like any other weapon, with
extreme care and with the respect due to a loaded gun, even though you are certain
the gun is unloaded. Never touch the trigger unless you are ready to fire.
x Never modify parts of the gun. Repairs and disassembly exceeding the basic field
stripping may only be carried out by qualified armourers or by FN HERSTAL.
x If the weapon has been heavily oiled or greased for shipment or storage, clean it
thoroughly and lightly lubricate the metal parts before firing.
x The barrel should be perfectly dry before firing.
x Never try to clear a barrel obstruction by firing.
4.2. SAFETY CHECKS

Carry out the following procedure in order to ensure that the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun
can be manipulated, stored and/or transported without any risk :
• Turn the safety catch (a) inwards under the trigger (641) so that the latter is blocked into
position (Fig. 4.a).
• Ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised (Fig. 4.a).
If the bolt latch release (639) is locked in its lower position by the lock (b) of the buffer tube sleeve
(620), unlock it by turning the sleeve clockwise when viewed from the rear side (Fig. 4.b).
• Open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440) and then ensure that there is no
ammunition on the feed tray (c) of the receiver (3100) (Fig. 4.c).
Take into account that, after shooting , the barrel (110) / (110/1) can be very hot.
If there is ammunition on the feed tray (c), unload the machine gun as described in § 6.4.
• Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and push it back forwards (Fig. 4.d).
Please note that, after this operation, the bolt (820) is held back at its rear position.
• Ensure that the chamber (d) and the front face of the bolt (820) are free from ammunition
(Fig. 4.e).
If not, unload the machine gun as described in § 6.4.
• Pointing the gun in a safe direction, push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to
release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position. Also unblock the
trigger (641), push down on it to release the firing pin (861) and then block it again.
Never close the feed cover (D1) with the bolt (820) held back at its rear position !
If, for any reason, the bolt (820) does not reach its most forward position and taking care not to
trap the fingers, pull it forwards by inserting a screwdriver or a similar tool into its upper groove
and using the upper plate of the receiver (3100) as a support.
Maintenance manual
- 83 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
820
B1
YY
YY-
ZZ
Y
YY
SY
Fig. 4.f - Checking if a correctly marked bolt (820) is used
Maintenance manual
- 84 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
4.2. SAFETY CHECKS (continued)

• Ensure that the first four digits of the number combination marked on the upper front part
of the bolt (820) correspond to the last four digits of the serial number of the machine gun
(Fig. 4.f).
The number combination marked on the upper front part of the bolt (820) is structured ‘ YYYY-ZZ’
where ‘YYYY’ represents the last four digits of the serial number of the machine gun and ‘ZZ’
represents the number of the presently used breech lock (221).
The serial number of the machine gun has been marked in the front part of the upper rear plate of
the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on F ig. 4.f).
If the digits do not correspond, the machine gun should be restricted for further use and the
following procedure should be carried out :
- Remove the bolt assembly (810) and the barrel extension assembly (200) as described for
‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
- Reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2, especially taking into account the checks
and the information given in the first step of the reassembling procedure.
• Close the feed cover (D1) and ensure that it locks correctly into position.
Maintenance manual
- 85 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 86 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 5 : RECEPTION OF THE GUN
Before any intervention on the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, ensure to be familiar
with the safety information given in chapter 4 of this maintenance manual.
• Take the packing case and inspect it for damage.
If the packing case shows traces of deterioration, take note of them (detailed description or photo)
and report it to FN Herstal.
• Open the packing case and check its contents according to the packing list.
If there is a problem, report it to FN Herstal.
• Carry out the field stripping procedure (refer to chapter 7).
If something seems abnormal, report it to FN Herstal.
• Clean the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) to remove the existing preservation lubricant.
Remove the preservation lubricant from the bolt group [ 5 ].
For more detailed cleaning instructions, refer to chapter 8.
• Lubricate the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and the bolt group [ 5 ] with a maintenance
or functional lubricant.
At this stage, the other parts of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun do not require lubrication.
For more detailed lubrication instructions, refer to chapter 8.
• Reassemble the machine gun.
Maintenance manual
- 87 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
523
541 a
522
520
Fig. 6.a - Rear sight leaf assembly (520) at its lowered

position (*)
523
520
b
522
547
541
Fig. 6.b - Rear sight leaf assembly (520) at its raised

position (*)
Maintenance manual
- 88 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 6 : USING THE MACHINE GUN
Before using the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, ensure to be familiar with the
safety information given in chapter 4 of this maintenance manual.
Always ensure that the barrel group [ 1 ] has correctly been locked into position
before shooting (for more information, refer to chapter 7).
6.1. PREPARATORY OPERATIONS
Mounting support
Ensure that the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun has been correctly installed and, if necessary,
locked onto its mounting support (tripod, weapon system, ...).
Barrel group [ 1 ]
Ensure that the barrel group [ 1 ] has correctly been installed and locked into position.
For more information about the correct installation of the barrel group [ 1 ], refer to its reinstallation
described in chapter 7.
Rear sight assembly (500) (*)
Set the rear sight assembly (500) for the correct shooting range taking into account the
following points :
• The rear sight leaf assembly (520) can be raised or lowered :
- When the rear sight leaf assembly (520) is lowered, the peep-hole (a) of the rear sight
slide (522) can be used as a fixed battlesight set for approx. 800 m (recommended for
quick firing (combat situations, ...)) (Fig. 6.a).
- When the rear sight leaf assembly (520) is raised, the peep-hole (b) of the rear sight slide
(522) allows aiming the machine gun from 200 m to 1200 m in steps of 200 m and
from 1200 m to 2500 m in steps of 100 m (Fig. 6.b).
The rear sight slide (522) should be positioned according to the indications which can be found
on the rear sight leaf (521).
• The rear sight slide (522) can be moved along the rear sight leaf (521) by turning the rear
sight slide elevating knob (523).
• If necessary, the rear sight windage knob (541) can be used to compensate the effects of
sidewind on the trajectory of the bullet(s), especially in case of long-distance firing.
In case of sidewind from the right/left side, the rear sight windage knob (541) should be turned
clockwise/counterclockwise when viewed from the left side in order to move the rear sight leaf
assembly (520) slightly towards the right/left side.
If no sidewind correction is necessary, the mark on the rear sight leaf assembly (520) should be
aligned with the ‘0’-line on the rear sight windage scale (547).
Maintenance manual
- 89 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
b a
Fig. 6.c - Ammunition belt
a 840
c
820
3100
3600
Fig. 6.d - Checking if the bolt (820) is at its front Fig. 6.e - Placing the ammunition belt onto the
position feed tray (c) of the receiver (3100)
((standard) left-hand feeding)
730
.
. .
.
639
Fig. 6.f - Cocking the machine gun by using the

cocking handle (730)
Maintenance manual
- 90 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
6.2. LOADING AND COCKING THE MACHINE GUN

It is assumed that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out.
• Take an ammunition belt (Fig. 6.c).

An ammunition belt has a double empty loop (a) at its right side and a single empty loop (b) at its
left side.
In case of a manually assembled ammunition belt, ensure that the rear ends of the cartridges of
the belt are perfectly aligned with each other.
• Open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440) and then ensure that the bolt
(820) is at its front position (Fig. 6.d).
• Place the ammunition belt onto the feed tray (c) of the receiver (3100) so that the first
cartridge is held by the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) (Fig. 6.e).
For the (standard) left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, the ‘first cartridge’ is the
cartridge with the double empty loop (a). For a right-hand fed machine gun, it is the cartridge with
the single empty loop (b).
NOTE : If necessary, it is also possible to load the ammunition belt without raising the feed
cover (D1) : using both thumbs, and with the empty loop(s) first, push the first
cartridge into the feed tray (c) and ensure that it is correctly engaged behind the
spring-loaded belt holding pawls assembly (3600).
• Cock the machine gun by proceeding as follows (Fig. 6.f) :
- Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and push it back forwards.
- Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820) so that the
latter returns towards its front position.
During this first back and forth movement of the bolt (820), the first cartridge will be moved
sidewards on the feed tray (c) of the receiver (3100) until it is positioned at the correct position
to be extracted from the ammunition belt.
- Pull the cocking handle (730) again completely rearwards and push it back forwards.
During this second rearward movement of the bolt (820), the first cartridge will be extracted
from the ammunition belt and will be fitted with its rim into the T-slot at the front side of the bolt.
At the same time, the first link will be ejected from the machine gun.
Ensure that the cocking handle (730) locks correctly into its front position and note that the bolt
(820) is again held back at its rear position.
- Again push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820) so that
the latter returns towards its front position.
During this second forward movement of the bolt (820), the first cartridge will be pushed further
downwards along the T-slot and then it will be pushed into the chamber of the barrel (110) /
(110/1).
Maintenance manual
- 91 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
641
639
Fig. 6.g - Unblocking the trigger (641)
641 641
620 639
639
Fig. 6.h - Single-shot firing Fig. 6.i - Automatic firing (bursts)
Maintenance manual
- 92 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
6.3. FIRING THE MACHINE GUN

Ensure that § 8.2. “Cleaning and lubrication before firing” has been carried out.
• If not already done, load and cock the machine gun as described in § 6.2.
• Turn the safety catch (a) outwards so that the trigger (641) is no longer blocked into
position : a red warning dot (b) will become visible (Fig. 6.g).
Single-shot firing (Fig. 6.h)

• Ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
This is the situation which is obtained after having carried out § 4.2. “Safety checks”.
• Aim the machine gun and then push down on the trigger (641) : the machine gun will fire a
single shot.
At the end of the firing cycle, the bolt latch (3838) will hold back the bolt (820) at its rear position
so that the operation of the machine gun is stopped.
• For a next single shot, proceed as follows :

- Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to raise the bolt latch (3838) and
therefore release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position.
- Aim the machine gun and then push down on the trigger (641).
Automatic firing (bursts) (Fig. 6.i)

• Push the bolt latch release (639) completely downwards and then turn the buffer tube sleeve
(620) counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side until the lock (c) of the sleeve is
positioned over the arm of the bolt latch release.
• Release the bolt latch release (639) and ensure that it is held back (and therefore locked) in
its lower position by the lock (c) of the buffer tube sleeve (620).
• Aim the machine gun and then push down on the trigger (641) : the machine gun will start
firing a burst.
The lowered bolt latch release (639) keeps the bolt latch (3838) at the raised position so that the
latch will not be able to hold back the bolt (820) at its rear position : the gun will continue firing
until the trigger (641) is released or until all the ammunition has been used.
Please note that, if the bolt latch release (639) is not locked in its lower position, bursts can also
be fired by pushing down on both the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641).
NOTE : In case of intensive shooting, and in order to avoid excessive heating of the barrel
(110) / (110/1), it is recommended to use more than one barrel group [ 1 ].
If the barrel (110) / (110/1) becomes overheated, there is also a risk of cook-off :
unexpected firing of a round caused by the transmission of heat from the barrel towards
the cartridge in the chamber.
Optimal efficiency of the machine gun is obtained when firing short bursts. However, the
MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun can fire one 100-round single burst without any risk.
For more information about the replacement of the barrel group [ 1 ], refer to chapter 7.
If no spare barrel group [ 1 ] is used and after having used the whole ammunition belt,
cooling down of the gun can be optimized by manually positioning the bolt (820) at its
rear position (unlock the bolt latch release (639) and then pull the cocking handle (730)
completely rearwards and push it back forwards).
When using more than one barrel group [ 1 ], use them equally in order to avoid that one
barrel group wears out more quickly than the other.
Maintenance manual
- 93 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
639 b
.
639
)
641 620
a
Fig. 6.j - Blocking the trigger (641) by means of Fig. 6.k - Unlocking the bolt latch release (639)
the safety catch (a) (if necessary)
(bolt latch release (639) unlocked and raised)
D1 840
c
.
3100 .
.
730
Fig. 6.m - Pulling the cocking handle (730)

Fig. 6.l - Removing the ammunition belt from the completely rearwards and then pushing it back
feed tray (c) forwards
820
Fig. 6.n - Checking if the front face of the bolt

(820) is clear
Maintenance manual
- 94 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
6.4. UNLOADING THE MACHINE GUN
• Turn the safety catch (a) inwards under the trigger (641) so that the latter is blocked into
position (Fig. 6.j).
• Ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised (Fig. 6.j).
If the bolt latch release (639) is locked in its lower position by the lock (b) of the buffer tube sleeve
(620), unlock it by turning the sleeve clockwise when viewed from the rear side (Fig. 6.k).
NOTE : Take into account that, after shooting, the barrel (110) / (110/1) can be very hot.
• Open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440) and then release and remove the
ammunition belt (Fig. 6.l).
To release the ammunition belt, it will be necessary to raise the extractor/ejector assembly (840) :
do not forget to lower the assembly after having removed the ammunition belt.
If present, remove any link from the feed tray (c) of the receiver (3100).
• Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and push it back forwards (Fig. 6.m).
Please note that this will cause the extraction of any cartridge remaining in the chamber and that,
after this operation, the bolt (820) is held back at its rear position.
• Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820) so that the
• Pull the cocking handle (730) again completely rearwards and push it back forwards.
Please note that, after this operation, the bolt (820) is again held back at its rear position.
• Open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440).
• Ensure that the front face of the bolt (820) is free from ammunition (Fig. 6.n).
If there is a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (820), first try if it can be ejected by firing as
described in § 6.3.
For this try, take into account all the safety precautions and note that it is not necessary to load
an ammunition belt.
If the cartridge cannot be ejected by firing, and with the bolt (820) held back at its rear position,
try to remove the cartridge by pushing downwards on the rim of its case with a tool such as a
screwdriver or pliers.
During this operation, NEVER touch the primer of the cartridge with the tool (in order to avoid
any risk of explosion) and ensure that the barrel is ALWAYS pointing in a safe direction !
release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position. Also unblock the
trigger (641), push down on it to release the firing pin (861) and then block it again.
Maintenance manual
- 95 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
(
120
.
.
730
110
110/1
120
By using the cocking handle (730) and By only using the carrying handle
the carrying handle assembly (120) assembly (120)
Fig. 7.a - Unlocking the barrel (110) / (110/1)
120
[1]
.
3817
Fig. 7.b - Removal of the barrel group [ 1 ]
The texts and illustrations of this chapter apply to the (standard) left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB
machine gun. In case of a right-hand fed machine gun, the procedure is completely similar.
Maintenance manual
- 96 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 7 : FIELD STRIPPING
7.1. DISASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN

It is very important to become familiar with the field stripping procedure of the machine gun as
field stripping is required during the cleaning procedure which ensures reliable operation of the
machine gun.
• If not already done, completely unload the machine gun (refer to § 6.4) and carry out the
safety checks (refer to § 4.2).
• While pushing the cocking handle (730) until it is positioned horizontally, unlock the barrel
(110) / (110/1) by turning the carrying handle assembly (120) towards its vertical position
(left part of Fig. 7.a).
Using the carrying handle assembly (120) in its vertical position, take the barrel group [ 1 ]
forwards out of the barrel support (3817) (Fig. 7.b) and then release the cocking handle
(730).
In fact, the barrel (110) / (110/1) is released from the front opening of the barrel extension body
(C1) (also refer to § 2.2.3).
If necessary, the barrel group [ 1 ] can also be removed by only using the carrying handle
assembly (120) (in such a case, it is recommended to stand at the front side of the machine gun) :
While firmly pushing the barrel group [ 1 ], by the carrying handle assembly (120),
approx. 20 mm inwards, unlock the barrel (110) / (110/1) by turning the carrying handle
assembly towards its vertical position (right part of Fig. 7.a).
Using the carrying handle assembly (120) in its vertical position, take the barrel group [ 1 ]
forwards out of the barrel support (3817) (Fig. 7.b).
Finally, note that it is also possible to remove the barrel group [ 1 ] without using the carrying
handle assembly (120) : just grip the barrel (110) / (110/1) firmly with both hands (in such a
case, be extremely careful not to burn the hands if the machine gun has fired recently : if
necessary, use anti-heat gloves !!).
• If, for any reason, the bolt (820) is held back at its rear position, proceed as follows to let it
return towards its front position :
- Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and hold it in that position.
- Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820) which will
now be held back by the cocking handle (730).
- Move the cocking handle (730) back forwards in order to guide the bolt (820) towards its
front position.
When the bolt (820) should be returned towards its front position with no barrel group [ 1 ]
installed on the machine gun, always use this procedure with the cocking handle (730) to guide
the bolt towards its front position !
It is absolutely necessary that the bolt (820) is at its front position in order to release the
pressure on the driving spring assembly (870) so that the assembly can be removed (see
further) without any risk.
Maintenance manual
- 97 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
600
.
.
870
.
.
.
644
648
3100 3838 3100
Fig. 7.c - Unlocking and removing the back plate Fig. 7.d - Unhooking and removing the driving
assembly (600) spring assembly (870)
3100
.
b
725
3100 961
Fig. 7.e - Removal of the bolt stud (725) Fig. 7.f - Unlocking and removing the moving
parts
810 810
865
863 840
900
900
200
920 910 c
d
C1
.
930 962 . 200
Fig. 7.g - Separating the moving parts
Maintenance manual
- 98 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
7.1. DISASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)

• While pulling the back plate latch lock (644) rearwards and holding it in that position, raise
the back plate latch (648) in order to unlock the back plate assembly (600) and then lift the
assembly up and off the receiver (3100) (Fig. 7.c).
• Ensure that the bolt (820) is at its front position (see before), release the rear end of the
driving spring assembly (870) (push it first forwards and then slightly to the left) and then
take the assembly out of the rear side of the bolt (820) and the receiver (3100) (Fig. 7.d).
• Using the cocking handle (730), slowly move the bolt assembly (810) rearwards until the
bolt stud (725) is aligned with the dismounting hole (a) in the slot in the side plate of the
receiver (3100) (upper left part of Fig. 7.e).
If, for any reason, the bolt (820) is moved too far rearwards and caught by the bolt latch (3838)
(also refer to Fig. 7.d), push the rear end of the bolt latch upwards (some force may be required)
to release the bolt and then push the latter back forwards.
• Through the dismounting hole (a), pull the bolt stud (725) out of the right side of the bolt
(820) (upper left part of Fig. 7.e).
In order not to lose the bolt stud (725), it is recommended to place it in the recess in the feed tray
of the receiver (3100) (lower right part of Fig. 7.e).
• Using the stem of the driving spring assembly (870) or another similar pointed tool through
the hole (b) in the right rear side of the receiver (3100), push the buffer body lock (961)
inwards so that it no longer holds back the moving parts and simultaneously pull the
moving parts out of the receiver (Fig. 7.f).
When taking the moving parts out of the receiver (3100), take into account that they can fall
apart.
• Slide the bolt assembly (810) rearwards off the barrel extension assembly (200) (Fig. 7.g).
• If the firing pin (861) does not protrude from the front face of the bolt (820), use the tip of a
screwdriver or a similar tool to push down on the sear (863) in order to release the firing
pin.
Before carrying out this operation and in order to avoid trapping the fingers by the rearward
movement of the upper end of the cocking lever (865), first move the latter towards its rear
position.
After having removed the bolt assembly (810), place it on its right side in order to avoid that the
extractor/ejector assembly (840) falls out.
• While turning the accelerator (962) completely forwards and slightly lowering the buffer
group (900), release the buffer group from the barrel extension assembly (200) (Fig. 7.g).
When turning the accelerator (962) completely forwards, its claws will release the rear shank (c)
of the barrel extension body (C1).
When, at the same time, the buffer group (900) is slightly lowered, the front nose (d) of the buffer
piston rod (930) is released from the rear nose of the rear shank (c) of the barrel extension body
(C1).
During this step, hold the buffer body assembly (910) slightly inclined (front side downwards) so
that the barrel buffer assembly (920) does not fall out of it.
• If not already done, slide the barrel buffer assembly (920) rearwards out of the buffer body
assembly (910) (Fig. 7.g).
This level of disassembly is sufficient to perform thorough cleaning : further

disassembly should only be carried out by an authorized armourer or by FN HERSTAL.
Maintenance manual
- 99 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
YY
YY-
ZZ
YY
Y
B1 820
SY
ZZ
Upside
down 221
YY
YY
C1
Fig. 7.h - Location of the serial number of the machine gun and the marks on the barrel extension body
(C1), the breech lock (221) and the bolt (820)
865 810
863 840
900
920 910 912 c

b 200
G1 C1
.
. a 962
930
810
940
900 200
Fig. 7.i - Reassembling the moving parts
Maintenance manual
- 100 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
7.2. REASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN

• Ensure that the upper front part of the bolt (820) has been marked with the number
combination ‘YYYY-ZZ’ where ‘YYYY’ represents the last four digits of the serial number of
the machine gun and ‘ZZ’ represents the number of the breech lock (221) presently
installed in the barrel extension body (C1) (Fig. 7.h).
Ensure that the bottom of the barrel extension body (C1) has been marked with the last four
digits of the serial number of the machine gun (‘YYYY’ on Fig. 7.h).
The serial number of the machine gun has been marked in the front part of the upper rear plate of
the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on Fig. 7.h).
The number of the breech lock (221) has been marked in its cavity (‘ZZ’ on Fig. 7.h).
If the bolt (820) has not been marked correctly, replace the bolt assembly (810) by an assembly
with a correctly marked bolt.
If the barrel extension body (C1) has not been marked correctly, replace the barrel extension
assembly (200) by an assembly with a correctly marked barrel extension body.
If there are no correctly marked parts available for the machine gun, it will be absolutely
necessary to carry out the adjustment of the headspace described in § 10.4.
During the adjustment procedure of the headspace, it will be asked to (change the) mark (of)
the bolt (820) (as described in § 9.5.9) and/or the barrel extension body (C1) (as described in
§ 9.3.3).
• Ensure that all the components of the machine gun are perfectly clean.
• From the rear side, insert the barrel buffer assembly (920) into the buffer body assembly
(910) (Fig. 7.i).
The guide lug (a) of the buffer spring guide (940) should be positioned at the right side so that it
correctly engages the inside groove of the buffer body (G1).
On the other hand, the front nose (b) of the buffer piston rod (930) should be facing upwards : if
necessary, correctly orient the buffer piston rod by turning it manually.
• While holding the buffer group (900) inclined downwards at an angle of approx. 30° and
while moving the accelerator (962) towards its horizontal position, reassemble the buffer
group and the barrel extension assembly (200) by fitting the left and right breech lock
depressors (912) of the buffer group into their housings in both sides of the barrel extension
body (C1) (Fig. 7.i).
Ensure that the narrower end of the rear shank (c) of the barrel extension body (C1) fits correctly
between the 2 claws of the accelerator (962).
Ensure that the front nose (b) of the buffer piston rod (930) engages correctly the rear nose of the
rear shank (c) of the barrel extension body (C1).
• Push the buffer group (900) firmly onto the barrel extension assembly (200) until the
accelerator (962) is rotated so that its 2 claws have locked themselves onto the rear shank
(c) of the barrel extension body (C1).
This causes the buffer group (900) to be locked to the barrel extension assembly (200).
• From the rear side, fit the bolt assembly (810) onto the barrel extension assembly (200)
(Fig. 7.i).
Ensure that the bolt assembly (810) fits correctly into the guides of the barrel extension body (C1)
and push it forwards until the lowered extractor/ejector assembly (840) comes into contact with
the front portion of the barrel extension body.
Maintenance manual
- 101 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
810 865
3838
.
.
961
Fig. 7.j - Pushing the cocking lever (865) Fig. 7.k - Reinserting the moving parts into the
completely forwards receiver (3100)
f
d
3100
e 725
820
725
Fig. 7.l - Reinstallation of the bolt stud (725)
Maintenance manual
- 102 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
7.2. REASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• Push the cocking lever (865) completely forwards (Fig. 7.j).
NOTE : When reinstalling the moving parts into the receiver (3100), it is absolutely necessary
that the cocking lever (865) is at its front position.
If, by inadvertence, the weapon is reassembled with the cocking lever (865) at its rear
position, the bolt assembly (810) will jam inside the receiver (3100) when the moving
parts are completely reinserted into the machine gun !
In such a case, it will be necessary to carry out the ‘emergency’ procedure described
further in this chapter (after the reinstallation of the bolt stud (725) and the complete
reinsertion of the moving parts).
• While holding the moving parts slightly inclined (front side downwards) and while raising
the bolt latch (3838) so that it does not hinder the insertion of the bolt assembly (810),
reinsert the moving parts into the rear side of the receiver (3100) (Fig. 7.k).
During this operation, the buffer body lock (961) will lock itself behind the rear end of the receiver
(3100) holding back the moving parts inside the receiver.
• Fit the bolt stud (725), from the right side, into its hole (d) in the bolt (820) (left part of
Fig. 7.l).
• Using the bolt stud (725), move the bolt assembly (810) until the wider ring of the stud is
aligned with the dismounting hole (e) in the slot in the side plate of the receiver (3100)
(right part of Fig. 7.l).
• Push the bolt stud (725) through the dismounting hole (e) as far as possible into its hole (d)
in the bolt (820) (right part of Fig. 7.l).
• While ensuring that the wider ring of the bolt stud (725) engages behind the slot in the side
plate of the receiver (3100), use the bolt stud to push the bolt assembly (810) (and
therefore also the moving parts) completely into the machine gun (right part of Fig. 7.l).
If, by inadvertence and referring to the above note, the moving parts would have been reinserted
with the cocking lever (865) at its rear position, the bolt assembly (810) has jammed inside the
receiver (3100).
In such a case, carry out the following ‘emergency’ procedure :
- Remove the trigger bar (3846) as described in § 9.2.12.

- Take the bolt handle (1075) and, at the right side of the machine gun, fit it onto the bolt stud
(725).
- Using the drift punch UT 2012 through the hole opposite to the hole (f) indicated in the right
part of Fig. 7.l and looking, from the rear side, inside the receiver (3100), disengage the tip of
the cocking lever (865) from the groove in the inner side of the upper rear plate of the receiver
frame (B1) and hold it in that position.
- Using the bolt handle (1075), pull the moving parts firmly rearwards in order to disengage
them and then pull them out of the receiver (3100).
- Reinstall the moving parts with a correctly positioned cocking lever (865) as described above.
Maintenance manual
- 103 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
600
.
.
870
.
.
.
644
648
3100 3100
Fig. 7.m - Reinstallation of the driving spring Fig. 7.n - Reinstallation of the back plate assembly
assembly (870) (600)
)
120
. .
730
110
110/1
120
Fig. 7.o - Reinstallation of the barrel group [ 1 ]
Maintenance manual
- 104 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
7.2. REASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• From the rear side of the receiver (3100), and with its positioning pin pointing towards the
right side, reinsert the driving spring assembly (870) into its housing in the right side of the
bolt (820) (Fig. 7.m).
• While compressing the driving spring assembly (870), secure it into position by engaging its
positioning pin in the pin hole in the right inner side of the receiver (3100) (Fig. 7.m).
• Reinstall the back plate assembly (600) by fitting it, from above, into its grooves at the rear
side of the receiver (3100) (Fig. 7.n).
Just before the back plate assembly (600) reaches its final lowered position, pull the back plate
latch lock (644) rearwards and hold it in that position until the back plate assembly has correctly
been locked into position by the back plate latch (648).
• Push the cocking handle (730) until it is positioned horizontally and hold it in that position
(left part of Fig. 7.o).
As a result, the moving parts are moved approx. 20 mm rearwards.
• Using the carrying handle assembly (120) at its vertical position, insert the barrel group [ 1 ]
as far as possible into the front opening of the barrel support (3817) (left part of Fig. 7.o).
• When the barrel group [ 1 ] is fully inserted, turn the carrying handle assembly (120) by 60°
towards the left side (right part of Fig. 7.o).
The barrel group [ 1 ] is fully inserted when the protruding extremity of the guide screw (3861) has
reached the bent part of the slot in the barrel (110) / (110/1).
The barrel group [ 1 ] is correctly locked into position when, inside the machine gun, the lug on
the front end of the barrel locking spring blade (241) engages the corresponding notch in the rear
end of the barrel (110) / (110/1).
If the carrying handle assembly (120) is not turned towards the left side, the carrying handle (123)
interferes with the line of sights of the machine gun indicating the shooter that the barrel group
[ 1 ] has not been locked into position.
Shooting with a not correctly locked barrel group [ 1 ] is very dangerous : it can cause the barrel
group to jump out as well as injuries to the shooter and serious damage to the internal parts of the
machine gun !
• Release the cocking handle (730).
• Carry out § 4.2. “Safety checks”.
Maintenance manual
- 105 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 106 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 8 : MAINTENANCE
Before any intervention on the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, ensure to be
familiar with the safety information given in chapter 4 of this maintenance manual.
The frequency at which the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun should be cleaned and lubricated
depends on the ammunition used, the weather and shooting conditions and other external
factors.
When using normal ammunition under normal conditions, it is a good rule to clean and
lubricate the machine gun after every use or, in case of intensive shooting, after each
1800 rounds : correct maintenance will enhance the longevity of the gun.
Under normal conditions, it is recommended to lubricate all the friction surfaces.
It is especially recommended to ensure that the inside of the feed cover (D1), the bolt assembly
(810), the barrel extension assembly (200), the buffer group (900), the driving spring assembly
(870), the extractor switch (3836), the breech lock cam (3816), the inner guides of the receiver
(3100) and the back plate group [ 9 ] are correctly lubricated.
NEVER use grease or oil on any part in contact with ammunition !
Under extreme climatic and combat conditions, it may be necessary to clean and lubricate more
frequently.
Please note that, as long as it is applied to the correct surfaces or parts (not to the bore and the
chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1)), too much lubrication is never detrimental to the good
operation of the machine gun.
When it is not used, the machine gun should be stored in a clean and dry location.
In such a case, and in order to ensure that the gun is always ready-to-use, it should be inspected,
cleaned and lubricated regularly (interval depending on the storage conditions).
NOTE : When using blank ammunition, which results in a quicker soiling of a weapon, the
cleaning frequency should be increased : the condition of the machine gun, and
especially its lubrication, should be followed up all along the shooting sequence.
Before cleaning the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun, ALWAYS ensure that it is
unloaded (refer to § 6.4).
8.1. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Lubrication : MIL-PRF-63460 (NATO S-758)
Preservation : MIL-PRF-63460 (NATO S-758)
Never use hydrocarbons, trichlorethylene nor ammonia : they could cause damage
to the gun !
Maintenance manual
- 107 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
D1
a
450
c
a 475
NO LUBRICATION b
e
840 b 474
e 865
d b b
f
842 g
i d
471
200 i 863
h b
E2 820
j 221 962
j
h
n
l
p n
k
k p
230 o 963
l m
q m
912
n
q
950 900
870 q
w w
NO LUBRICATION
641
r 639
u
r
t
3836 u
t
[9]
v
NO LUBRICATION
s
s v
3816
s
3100 648 644
Fig. 8.a - Points to be lubricated before firing (if parts have been represented disassembled exceeding
normal field stripping, this is only for reasons of clarity)
Maintenance manual
- 108 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
8.2. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION BEFORE FIRING

The following procedure assumes that the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun has correctly been
cleaned and lubricated the last time it has been used (also refer to § 8.3).
If the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun is used for the first time upon purchase, it is assumed that
the procedure described in chapter 5 has been carried out.
• Carry out the field stripping procedure as described in § 7.1.

• Using the cleaning tools 1010 and clean rags (pieces of flannel), remove the maintenance
lubricant from the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) until the last rag is
clean (also refer to § 8.3 (a)).
• Dry the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1).
• Remove the maintenance lubricant from the inside of the feed cover (D1), the bolt assembly
(810), the barrel extension assembly (200), the buffer group (900), the driving spring
assembly (870), the extractor switch (3836), the breech lock cam (3816), the inner guides
of the receiver (3100) and the back plate group [ 9 ].
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the front face of the
bolt (820) and to the ammunition feeding and ejection section (‘NO LUBRICATION’
on Fig. 8.a).
• Slightly lubricate by applying 1 or 2 drops of functional lubricant to (Fig. 8.a) :
- the mechanism inside of the feed cover (D1) and especially the belt feed slide (450)
(arrows ‘a’), the belt feed lever (471) (front and rear extremities and pivoting hole) and its
pin (475) (arrows ‘b’) as well as the extractor guide cam (arrow ‘c’).
- the pivoting point and the ejector (842) of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) (arrows
‘d’), the presently used free groove on top of the bolt (820) (arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever
(865) and the upper end of the firing pin spring stop (868) (arrow ‘f’), the sear (863)
(arrow ‘g’) and the firing pin assembly (E2) (reachable from underneath the bolt (arrows
‘h’)).
- the sliding bottom surface of the bolt (820) (arrows ‘i’) and the corresponding sliding
guides of the barrel extension assembly (200) (arrows ‘j’).
- the sliding bottom surface of the barrel extension assembly (200) (arrows ‘k’).
- the breech lock (221) and its pin (230) (located in the barrel extension assembly (200))
(arrows ‘l’) and the corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (3816) (arrows ‘m’).
- the accelerator (962) and its pin (950) (arrows ‘n’), the buffer spring (963) (arrow ‘o’)
and the breech lock depressors (912) (arrows ‘p’).
- the driving spring assembly (870) (arrows ‘q’).
- the extractor switch (3836) (arrows ‘r’), the breech lock cam (3816) (arrows ‘s’) as well as
all the inner guides of the receiver (3100) (arrows ‘t’).
- the sliding grooves of the back plate group [ 9 ] (arrows ‘u’).
- the pivoting points of the back plate latch (648) and its lock (644) (arrows ‘v’).
- the pivoting points of the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) (arrows ‘w’).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2.
Before each shooting sequence, ALWAYS check the barrel (110) / (110/1) for
obstructions and ensure that it is dry and clean.
Maintenance manual
- 109 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1020
110 1050
110/1
1031
1040
Fig. 8.b - Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050 for a first cleaning of the
barrel (110) / (110/1)
1020
110
110/1
1031
1010
1032
Fig. 8.c - Using the cleaning tools 1010 for the final cleaning of the barrel (110) / (110/1)
Maintenance manual
- 110 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
8.3. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION AFTER FIRING

• Carry out the field stripping procedure as described in § 7.1.
(a) Barrel group [ 1 ]
• Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050 (and a spray), apply solvent
inside the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and let the product work
a few minutes (Fig. 8.b).
• Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050, remove as much as possible
the solvent and the residues from the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) /
(110/1) (Fig. 8.b).
• Using the cleaning tools 1010 and clean rags (pieces of flannel), clean the bore and
the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) until the last rag is clean (Fig. 8.c).
• When the barrel (110) / (110/1) is clean, again use a piece of flannel, this time
moistened with maintenance lubricant, to protect the bore and the chamber of the
barrel until the next use.
Please note that the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) should be wiped dry
before shooting (also refer to § 8.2).
• Clean the remaining part of the barrel group [ 1 ] with a soft, dry cloth.
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the cleaned parts are perfectly dry
before reassembling the machine gun.
• Protect the outside of the barrel group [ 1 ] by using a rag lightly moistened with
maintenance lubricant.
(b) Receiver group [ 2 ]
• Clean with a soft, dry cloth.

Pay special attention to the extractor switch (3836) (arrows ‘r’ on Fig. 8.a), the breech lock
cam (3816) (arrows ‘s’) as well as all the inner guides of the receiver (3100) (arrows ‘t’).
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the cleaned parts are perfectly dry
before reassembling the machine gun.
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the ammunition
feeding and ejection section (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the extractor switch (3836) (arrows ‘r’
on Fig. 8.a), the breech lock cam (3816) (arrows ‘s’) as well as all the inner guides of
the receiver (3100) (arrows ‘t’).
Maintenance manual
- 111 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 112 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
8.3. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION AFTER FIRING (continued)

(c) Barrel extension group [ 3 ]

Pay special attention to the breech lock (221) and its pin (230) (arrows ‘l’ on Fig. 8.a), the
corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (3816) (arrows ‘m’), the sliding bottom surface
of the barrel extension assembly (200) (arrows ‘k’) and the sliding guides for the bolt (820)
on the barrel extension assembly (arrows ‘j’).
• In case of important soiling of the barrel extension group [ 3 ], proceed as follows :
- Remove the breech lock (221) as described in § 9.3.2.
- Clean the barrel extension body (C1) as well as the disassembled components with a
brush and/or a soft cloth.
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the components are perfectly dry
before reassembling them.
- Reinstall the breech lock (221) as described in § 9.3.2.
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the breech lock (221) and its pin (230)
(arrows ‘l’ on Fig. 8.a), the corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (3816)
(arrows ‘m’), the sliding bottom surface of the barrel extension assembly (200) (arrows
‘k’) and the sliding guides for the bolt (820) on the barrel extension assembly
(arrows ‘j’).
(d) Feed cover group [ 4 ]

Pay special attention to the mechanism inside of the feed cover (D1) and especially the belt
feed slide (450) (arrows ‘a’ on Fig. 8.a), the belt feed lever (471) (front and rear extremities
and pivoting hole) and its pin (475) (arrows ‘b’) as well as the extractor guide cam
(arrow ‘c’).
• In case of important soiling of the feed cover group [ 4 ], proceed as follows :
- Disassemble the feed cover group [ 4 ] by carrying out the different removal and
disassembly procedures given in § 9.4.
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the feed cover latch
(479), the feed cover latch shaft (440) and their fixing components.
- Clean the feed cover body (410) as well as the disassembled components with a
- Reassemble the feed cover group [ 4 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
reassembly procedures given in § 9.4.
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the mechanism inside of the feed cover
(D1) and especially the belt feed slide (450) (arrows ‘a’ on Fig. 8.a), the belt feed lever
(471) (front and rear extremities and pivoting hole) and its pin (475) (arrows ‘b’) as well
as the extractor guide cam (arrow ‘c’).
Maintenance manual
- 113 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
820
1060
1071
1072
Fig. 8.d - Using the cleaning tools 1060 and 1071 to clean
the hole for the firing pin (861) in the bolt (820)
Maintenance manual
- 114 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(e) Bolt group [ 5 ]

Pay special attention to the pivoting point and the ejector (842) of the extractor/ejector
assembly (840) (arrows ‘d’ on Fig. 8.a), the presently used free groove on top of the bolt
(820) (arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever (865) and the upper end of the firing pin spring stop
(868) (arrow ‘f’), the sear (863) (arrow ‘g’), the firing pin assembly (E2) (reachable from
underneath the bolt (arrows ‘h’)), the sliding bottom surface of the bolt (arrows ‘i’) and the
driving spring assembly (870) (arrows ‘q’).
• If necessary, use a screwdriver to remove any carbon and other residues from the bolt
assembly (810).
• In case of important soiling of the bolt assembly (810), proceed as follows :
- Completely disassemble the bolt assembly (810) by carrying out the different
removal and disassembly procedures given in § 9.5.
- Using the cleaning tools 1060 and 1071 from the rear side, clean the hole for the
firing pin (861) in the bolt (820) (Fig. 8.d).
- Clean the bolt (820) as well as the disassembled components with a brush and/or a
soft cloth.
- Reassemble the bolt assembly (810) by carrying out the different reinstallation and
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the front face of the
bolt (820) (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the pivoting point and the ejector (842)
of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) (arrows ‘d’ on Fig. 8.a), the presently used free
groove on top of the bolt (820) (arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever (865) and the upper end
of the firing pin spring stop (868) (arrow ‘f’), the sear (863) (arrow ‘g’), the firing pin
assembly (E2) (reachable from underneath the bolt (arrows ‘h’)) and the sliding bottom
surface of the bolt (arrows ‘i’).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the driving spring assembly (870)

(arrows ‘q’).
Maintenance manual
- 115 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(f) Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*)
The following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare case of apparent soiling of
the rear sight group [ 6 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning operation will be sufficient.
• Disassemble the rear sight group [ 6 ] by carrying out the different removal and
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the rear sight windage
scale (547).
• Clean the rear sight base (510) as well as the disassembled components with a brush
and/or a soft cloth.
• Reassemble the rear sight group [ 6 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
After any intervention on the rear sight group [ 6 ], the firing precision of the machine
gun should be checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.1 and § 10.2.
(g) Buffer group [ 7 ]

Except the first and last steps, the following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare
case of important soiling of the buffer group [ 7 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning and lubrication
operation will be sufficient.

Pay special attention to the accelerator (962) and its pin (950) (arrows ‘n’ on Fig. 8.a), the
buffer spring (963) (arrow ‘o’) and the breech lock depressors (912) (arrows ‘p’).
• In case of exceptional soiling of the buffer group [ 7 ], proceed as follows :
- Disassemble the buffer group [ 7 ] by carrying out the different removal and
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the buffer body lock
(961).
- Clean the buffer body (G1) as well as the disassembled components with a brush
- Reassemble the buffer group [ 7 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the accelerator (962) and its pin (950)
(arrows ‘n’ on Fig. 8.a), the buffer spring (963) (arrow ‘o’) and the breech lock
depressors (912) (arrows ‘p’).
Maintenance manual
- 116 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(h) Cocking handle group [ 8 ]
The following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare case of apparent soiling of
the cocking handle group [ 8 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning operation will be sufficient.
• Disassemble the cocking handle group [ 8 ] by carrying out the different removal and
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the cocking slide lever
stud (714) and the cocking slide stop pin (724) and to separate the cocking slide lever (713)
from the cocking handle (730).
• Clean the cocking slide bracket (711) as well as the disassembled components with a
• Reassemble the cocking handle group [ 8 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation
and reassembly procedures given in § 9.8.
(i) Back plate group [ 9 ]

Except the first and last steps, the following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare
case of important soiling of the back plate group [ 9 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning and
lubrication operation will be sufficient.
Please note that, as long as the inside parts of the back plate group [ 9 ] are not too soiled,
outside soiling will not hinder its correct operation.

Pay special attention to the sliding grooves of the back plate group [ 9 ] (arrows ‘u’ on
Fig. 8.a), the pivoting points of the back plate latch (648) and its lock (644) (arrows ‘v’) and
the pivoting points of the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) (arrows ‘w’).
• In case of exceptional soiling of the back plate group [ 9 ], proceed as follows :
- Completely disassemble the back plate group [ 9 ] by carrying out the different
removal and disassembly procedures given in § 9.9.
- Clean the back plate subassembly (610) as well as the disassembled components
with a brush and/or a soft cloth.
Never use solvent on the fiber buffer disks (635) : just lightly lubricate them after cleaning.
- Reassemble the back plate group [ 9 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the sliding grooves of the back plate
group [ 9 ] (arrows ‘u’ on Fig. 8.a), the pivoting points of the back plate latch (648)
and its lock (644) (arrows ‘v’) and the pivoting points of the bolt latch release (639)
and the trigger (641) (arrows ‘w’).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 117 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
126
120
123
127 125
121
122
110
110/1
Fig. 9.1.a - Barrel group [ 1 ]
.
125
.
110
110/1 120
Fig. 9.1.b - Removal of the carrying handle assembly (120)
Maintenance manual
- 118 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
9.1. BARREL GROUP [ 1 ] (Fig. 9.1.a)
9.1.1. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle assembly (120)
• Remove the barrel group [ 1 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Unlock the carrying handle assembly (120) by raising the upper end of the carrying handle
locking latch (125) and then slide the assembly forwards off the barrel (110) / (110/1)
(Fig. 9.1.b).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account the following points
(Fig. 9.1.c) :
- When fitting the carrying handle assembly (120) back into position, ensure that its rear
lug (a) correctly engages the notch (b) provided in the barrel (110) / (110/1).
- The carrying handle assembly (120) is only correctly locked into position when the wider
part of the carrying handle locking latch (125) correctly engages the groove (c) provided
in the barrel (110) / (110/1).
125
a b
110
110/1 120 . c
Fig. 9.1.c - Reinstallation of the carrying handle assembly (120)
Maintenance manual
- 119 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
122
125
.
UT 2008
121
Fig. 9.1.d - Removal of the carrying handle locking latch

(125)
127 123
126
.
127 121
Fig. 9.1.f - Removal of the carrying handle (123)

from the stem of the carrying handle body (121)
120
Fig. 9.1.e - Unscrewing the nut (127)
Maintenance manual
- 120 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.1. BARREL GROUP [ 1 ] (continued)
9.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle locking latch (125)
Requirements : • UT 2008 (Drift punch, dia. 1.9 mm, lg 25 mm)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the carrying handle assembly (120) as described in § 9.1.1.
NOTE : In order to facilitate the following disassembling (and reassembling) procedure, the
carrying handle assembly (120) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the carrying handle assembly (120) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2008 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the spring pin (122)
(Fig. 9.1.d).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the spring pin (122) must always be replaced by a
new one !
• When withdrawing the drift punch UT 2008, the carrying handle locking latch (125) will be
released from the carrying handle body (121) (Fig. 9.1.d).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order.
9.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of the carrying handle (123)
Requirements : • UT 1304 (Straight box wrench 12 x 13 mm)

• UT 1425 (Bar, dia. 6 mm)
• Remove the carrying handle assembly (120) as described in § 9.1.1.
carrying handle assembly (120) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the carrying handle assembly (120) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using the wrench UT 1304 together with the bar UT 1425, unscrew the nut (127)
(Fig. 9.1.e).
• Taking care not to lose the washer (126), pull the carrying handle (123) off the stem of the
carrying handle body (121).
Maintenance manual
- 121 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3500
3505
b
B2
3834 c 3828 a
b 3504
d B1
c
3503
d
3502
a
3835
Fig. 9.2.a - Rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and front cartridge
stop (3828)
Maintenance manual
- 122 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2. RECEIVER GROUP [ 2 ]
9.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and
the front cartridge stop (3828)
This procedure applies to the (standard) left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun. In case of
a right-hand fed machine gun, refer to § 12.1.
Requirements : • UT 1803 (Half-round nose pliers)
• At the right side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver frame (B1)
and using the pliers UT 1803, pull the locking pin (3834) out of the front end of the right
mounting pin (3835) (left part of Fig. 9.2.b).
• Taking into account that the front cartridge stop (3828) and then the rear cartridge stop
assembly (3500) will be released, withdraw the right mounting pin (3835) by pulling it
rearwards (Fig. 9.2.b).
• Remove the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and the front cartridge stop (3828).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account the following
points :
- Ensure that the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and the front cartridge stop (3828)
are oriented correctly and that they are installed into the correct mounting slots.
- Ensure that the locking pin (3834) fits correctly into position.
UT 1803
B1 3500 3828
3834
3835 3834
3835
Fig. 9.2.b - Removal of the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and the front cartridge stop (3828)
Maintenance manual
- 123 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2010 3505
B2
.
3502
3502 3504
3503
3505
Fig. 9.2.c - Disassembling the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500)
Maintenance manual
- 124 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2. RECEIVER GROUP [ 2 ] (continued)
9.2.2. Disassembling and reassembling the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500)
Requirements : • OREA 722 (Center punch, round-end)

• UT 1803 (Half-round nose pliers)
• UT 2010 (Drift punch, dia. 2.9 mm, lg 40 mm)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) as described in § 9.2.1.
rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) into a vice, use special clamps or a
rag to avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2010 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the pin (3505) (left
part of Fig. 9.2.c).
Take into account that the extremities of the pin (3505) have been staked.
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the pin (3505) must always be replaced by a new
one !
• While holding the cartridge aligning pawl (3502) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift
punch UT 2010.
• Gently release and then remove the cartridge aligning pawl (3502), its plunger (3503) and
its spring (3504) from the rear cartridge stop (B2) (right part of Fig. 9.2.c).
points :
- The cartridge aligning pawl spring (3504) should fit into the plunger (3503) which, on its
turn, should fit into the corresponding housing in the cartridge aligning pawl (3502).
- After its reinstallation, secure the pin (3505) by staking its extremities by using the center
punch OREA 722 and the hammer UT 2111.
Maintenance manual
- 125 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3834
c
d B1
b
3603 a
3601 c
3602 a
3600 3835
3827 d
Fig. 9.2.d - Belt holding pawls assembly (3600)
UT 1803
a
. 3834
B1
3835
3602 3601
3834 3835
3600
3827 3603 3827
Fig. 9.2.e - Removal of the left and right belt holding pawls (3601) and (3602)
Maintenance manual
- 126 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.3. Removal and reinstallation of the left and right belt holding pawls (3601)
and (3602)
This procedure applies to the (standard) left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun. In case of
a right-hand fed machine gun, refer to § 12.1.
• At the left side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver frame (B1)
and using the pliers UT 1803, pull the locking pin (3834) out of the front end of the left
mounting pin (3835) (left part of Fig. 9.2.e).
• While holding the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) in position with a finger, withdraw the
left mounting pin (3835) by pulling it rearwards (Fig. 9.2.e).
Take into account that the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) is subjected to the force of the pawl
springs (3827).
• Remove the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) together with the 2 pawl springs (3827).
• Separate the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) into the left belt holding pawl (3601), the
right belt holding pawl (3602) and the belt holding pawls sleeve (3603) (right part of
Fig. 9.2.e).
points :
- Slightly lubricate the 2 pawl springs (3827) before reinstalling them into their holes (a)
(right part of Fig. 9.2.e).
- Ensure that the locking pin (3834) fits correctly into position.
Maintenance manual
- 127 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2301
UT 2322
UT 2301 UT 2322 OREA 235
3861 OREA 235 3861 b
3863
3817 a
a
3863
Fig. 9.2.f - Removal of the guide screw (3861) Fig. 9.2.g - Reinstallation of the guide screw
and the safety washer (3863) (3861) and the safety washer (3863)
Maintenance manual
- 128 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.4. Removal and reinstallation of the guide screw (3861) and the safety
washer (3863)
Requirements : • OREA 235 (Screwdriver 13x3.8 (hexagonal tip) modified)

• OREA 721 (Center punch, flat-end)
• OREA 722 (Center punch, round-end)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• UT 2301 (Torque wrench)
• UT 2322 (Screwdriver socket, torque wrench, 1/2”)
• Screwdriver or similar tool
• Using a screwdriver or a similar tool, release the 2 tabs (a) of the safety washer (3863) from
the groove of the guide screw (3861) (Fig. 9.2.f).
• Using the torque wrench UT 2301 (with socket UT 2322 and tip OREA 235), unscrew and
remove the guide screw (3861) together with the safety washer (3863) from the barrel
support (3817) (Fig. 9.2.f).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the safety washer (3863) must always be replaced by
a new one !
points (Fig. 9.2.g) :
- When reinstalling a new safety washer (3863), its tabs (a) should be pointing upwards.
- When tightening the guide screw (3861), first apply a torque of 20 Nm by using the
torque wrench UT 2301 (with socket UT 2322 and tip OREA 235) and then push the 2
tabs (a) of the safety washer (3863) into the groove of the guide screw by using the
center punch OREA 721 and the hammer UT 2111.
After that, determine which recess (b) in the barrel support body is most distant from the
groove of the guide screw (3861) and then secure the safety washer (3863) by staking its
edge into that recess by using the center punch OREA 722 and the hammer UT 2111.
Maintenance manual
- 129 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1803
B1
3823
3821 3823
3821 B1
3817
Fig. 9.2.h - Unlocking the barrel support (3817) by disengaging the locking pin (3821)
c b
a 3100
b
a c
OREA 742
d .
3817
.
f g
e
i
h
Fig. 9.2.i - Loosening the barrel support (3817)
Maintenance manual
- 130 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.2.5. Removal of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818)
Requirements : • OREA 742 (Tooling for sleeve support, barrel)
• In case of ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, requirements of § 13.1.6 (a)
• If necessary, requirements of § 9.2.4
• Remove the barrel group [ 1 ], the back plate assembly (600), the driving spring assembly
(870) and the moving parts as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, remove the ring sight
assembly (1400) as described in § 13.1.6 (a).
Please note that the illustrations of § 9.2.5 to § 9.2.8 show the receiver (3100) with the (standard)
front sight (3824).
• If necessary, remove the guide screw (3861) and the safety washer (3863) as described in
§ 9.2.4.
• Turn the machine gun upside down.
• Underneath the machine gun, and in order to unlock the barrel support (3817), disengage
the locking pin (3821) by proceeding as follows :
- Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the extremities of the split pin (3823) and straighten
them (left part of Fig. 9.2.h).
- Pull the locking pin (3821) rearwards and then turn it so that it is held back at its rear
position by the contact between the straightened extremities of the split pin (3823) and
the receiver frame (B1) (right part of Fig. 9.2.h).
If the locking pin (3821) is blocked and cannot be pulled rearwards, push it rearwards by using
a pointed tool such as a drift punch through the lower hole in the flange of the barrel support
(3817).
• Loosen the barrel support (3817) by proceeding as follows :
- Fix the supporting part of the tool OREA 742 into a vice or on a tripod, unscrew the nut
(a) and then, without removing the bush (b), remove the screw (c) of the tool. After that,
pull the rod (d) out of the right side of the tool (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.i).
- Fit the machine gun with the front part of its receiver (3100) into the fork of the tool
OREA 742, align the front mounting hole in the receiver with the holes in the tool and
then secure by using the screw (c) (inserted from the right side) and the nut (a) (upper
right part of Fig. 9.2.i).
- Fit the ring of the tool OREA 742 onto the barrel support (3817) as shown in the middle
part of Fig. 9.2.i, fit the fork-headed screw (e) between the 2 flanges of the ring and then
insert the pin (f) into the closest hole (g) of the ring (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.i).
- Turning the crank (h) of the tool, fit the fork-headed screw (e) onto the pin (f) (lower left
part of Fig. 9.2.i).
- Continue turning the crank (h) in order to loosen the barrel support (3817) by approx.
45° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side (lower right part of
Fig. 9.2.i).
- Turn the crank (h) back by a few turns in order to release the fork-headed screw (e) from
the pin (f), move the pin towards the next hole (i) and then repeat the 2 previous steps in
order to loosen the barrel support (3817) by another 1/8 turn.
- Repeat this operation until the barrel support (3817) can be unscrewed manually or by
using a rod inserted into its holes.
Maintenance manual
- 131 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
.
3817
3100
3818
Fig. 9.2.j - Removal of the barrel support (3817) and the

shim (3818)
3818
o 3100
OREA 742
Fig. 9.2.k - Reinstallation of the shim (3818)
3817
3818 ◊
3100
3817
OREA 742
Fig. 9.2.l - Reinstalling the barrel support (3817) and manually tightening it
Maintenance manual
- 132 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.2.5. Removal of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818) (continued)
• Using the ring of the tool OREA 742 or a rod inserted into its holes, completely unscrew the
barrel support (3817) from the threaded cylindrical mounting support at the front side of
the receiver (3100) (Fig. 9.2.j).
• Remove the shim (3818) from the receiver (3100) (Fig. 9.2.j).
9.2.6. Reinstallation of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818)
Before reinstalling the barrel support (3817), ensure that it is perfectly clean : pay special
attention to its inner rear thread as well as to its contact surface with the shim (3818). Also ensure
that the outer thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (3100) is
perfectly clean.
It is assumed that the receiver (3100) is still secured into the fork of the supporting part of the tool
OREA 742 (also refer to § 9.2.5).
• Fit the shim (3818) onto the threaded cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the
receiver (3100) (Fig. 9.2.k).
Ensure that the shim (3818) is oriented correctly : the chamfered side of its large opening should
be facing towards the receiver (3100) while the small hole (o) for the locking pin (3821) should
be at the lower side.
Also ensure that the shim (3818) fits correctly into the fork of the tool OREA 742 and that its small
hole (o) is correctly aligned with the hole with the locking pin (3821) in the front side of the
receiver (3100).
• Lightly lubricate the outer thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the
receiver (3100).
• Screw the barrel support (3817) onto the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of
the receiver (3100) and then, by using the ring of the tool OREA 742, tighten it manually
against the shim (3818) (left part of Fig. 9.2.l).
• Looking from the front side, check if the barrel support (3817) is oriented as shown in the
right part of Fig. 9.2.l.
The corner (◊) of the barrel support (3817) should be located at 4 to 5 mm from the imaginary
vertical central line of the machine gun.
If so, directly proceed to the following step.
If not, the presently installed shim (3818) should be replaced by another one by proceeding
as follows :
- Completely unscrew the barrel support (3817).
- Replace the presently installed shim (3818) by another one.
Twelve different shims (3818/1 to 1318/12 (recognizable by an engraved number)) are
available and, in increasing numerical order, the thickness of each shim increases by
0.06 - 0.07 mm. This corresponds to a modification of the angular position of the tightened
barrel support (3817) by 15° - 17°.
- Screw the barrel support (3817) back into position and check its orientation as described
above.
Maintenance manual
- 133 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
c
OREA 742
d
3817
.
OREA 742 j . f
f
Fig. 9.2.m - Final tightening and correct positioning of the barrel support (3817)
Maintenance manual
- 134 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.6. Reinstallation of the barrel support (3817) and the shim (3818) (continued)
• From the right side, insert the rod (d) completely into its hole just underneath the screw (c)
of the tool OREA 742 (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.m).
The rod (d) will actuate the head of the split pin (3823) so that the split pin is turned. As a result,
the straightened extremities of the split pin will lose contact with the receiver frame (B1) so that
they no longer hold back the locking pin (3821) at its rear position : the locking pin will therefore
be pushed forwards by the force of the locking spring (3822) and held back by the body of the
barrel support (3817) itself as the corresponding groove in the support is not aligned with the
locking pin yet.
• With the ring of the tool OREA 742 fitted onto the barrel support (3817), fit the fork-
headed screw (e) between the 2 flanges of the ring and then insert the pin (f) into the closest
hole (j) of the ring as shown in the middle and right parts of Fig. 9.2.m.
• Turning the crank (h) of the tool, fit the fork-headed screw (e) onto the pin (f) (right part of
Fig. 9.2.m).
• Continue turning the crank (h) in order to tighten the barrel support (3817) in the clockwise
direction when viewed from the front side until the barrel support is positioned correctly
(Fig. 9.2.m).
When the barrel support (3817) reaches its correct position, the locking pin (3821) will engage,
by the force of the locking spring (3822), into one of the 2 grooves at the rear side of the barrel
support body so that the barrel support is locked into position.
• Turn the crank (h) back by a few turns in order to release the fork-headed screw (e) from the
pin (f), remove the pin and then slide the ring of the tool OREA 742 off the barrel support
(3817).
• Unscrew the nut (a) and then, without removing the bush (b), remove the screw (c) of the
tool in order to release the machine gun from the tool.
• Take the machine gun out of the supporting part of the tool OREA 742 and then reinstall
the screw (c) (inserted from the right side) and the nut (a).
• Underneath the machine gun, ensure that the locking pin (3821) has correctly engaged
one of the 2 grooves at the rear side of the barrel support body and then, using the pliers
UT 1803, lock the split pin (3823) by bending its 2 extremities.
• If they have been removed, reinstall the (new) safety washer (3863) and the guide screw
(3861) as described in § 9.2.4.
• In case of a machine gun equipped with the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit, reinstall the ring sight
assembly (1400) as described in § 13.1.6 (a).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 135 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1913
OREA 228
3820
B1
OREA 742
3819
Fig. 9.2.n - Removal of the breech bearing (3819)
Maintenance manual
- 136 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.7. Removal of the breech bearing (3819)
Requirements : • OREA 228 (Wrench for ring guide, barrel MI.50)

• OREA 742 (Tooling for sleeve support, barrel)
• UT 1913 (Screwdriver 5.5 x 150 mm)
• Remove the barrel support (3817) as described in § 9.2.5.
It is assumed that the receiver (3100) is still secured into the fork of the supporting part of the tool
OREA 742 (also refer to § 9.2.5).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, take out the breech bearing locking screw (3820) (left part
of Fig. 9.2.n).
• Using the wrench OREA 228, screw the breech bearing (3819) out of the threaded
cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver frame (B1) (right part of
Fig. 9.2.n).
Maintenance manual
- 137 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2442
OREA 742
3819
OREA 228
UT 1913
3820
B1
OREA 742
3819
Fig. 9.2.o - Reinstallation of the breech bearing (3819) and, if it is replaced by a new one, also drilling it
Maintenance manual
- 138 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.8. Reinstallation of the breech bearing (3819)
Requirements : • OREA 228 (Wrench for ring guide, barrel)

• OREA 742 (Tooling for sleeve support, barrel)
• If necessary, UT 2442 (Twist drill, dia. 5.1 mm)
Before reinstalling the breech bearing (3819), ensure that it is perfectly clean : pay special
attention to its outer rear thread. Also ensure that the inner thread of the cylindrical mounting
support at the front side of the receiver frame (B1) is perfectly clean.
It is assumed that the receiver frame (B1) is still secured into the fork of the supporting part of the
tool OREA 742 (also refer to § 9.2.5).
• Lightly lubricate the inner thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the
receiver frame (B1).
• Screw the breech bearing (3819) into the threaded cylindrical mounting support at the front
side of the receiver frame (B1) and then, by using the wrench OREA 228, tighten it against
the receiver (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.o).
• If the breech bearing (3819) is not replaced by a new one, ensure that its hole for its
locking screw (3820) is perfectly aligned with the corresponding hole in the receiver frame
(B1).
If necessary, loosen the breech bearing (3819) in order to obtain a perfect alignment of the holes.
If the breech bearing (3819) is replaced by a new one, and using the drill UT 2442 through
the corresponding hole in the receiver frame (B1), drill into the bearing in order to create a
hole for the breech bearing locking screw (3820) (upper right part of Fig. 9.2.o).
After having drilled, remove any drilling residues.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, screw the breech bearing locking screw (3820) fully home
(lower part of Fig. 9.2.o).
Ensure that the breech bearing locking screw (3820) does not protrude inside the mounting
support of the receiver frame (B1).
If the screw protrudes (especially when it has been replaced by a new one), it should be filed until
it has a length of 5.45 ± 0.25 mm.
• Reinstall the barrel support (3817) as described in § 9.2.6.
• Reassemble the machine gun as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 139 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1803
3822
3821
3823
.
Fig. 9.2.p - Removal of the locking pin (3821)
Maintenance manual
- 140 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.9. Removal and reinstallation of the locking pin (3821)

• Remove the barrel support (3817) as described in § 9.2.5.
• Take the machine gun out of the supporting part of the tool OREA 742.
• Turn the machine gun upside down.
Please note that, in order to unlock the barrel support (3817), the locking pin (3821) has been
pulled back at its rear position and held there by means of the split pin (3823) (also refer to
§ 9.2.5).
• Release the locking pin (3821) by turning it.
The straightened extremities of the split pin (3823) will lose contact with the receiver frame (B1) so
that the locking pin (3821) will be pushed forwards by the force of the locking spring (3822).
• Push the locking pin (3821) rearwards so that the locking spring (3822) is compressed and,
as a result, the pressure on the split pin (3823) is released.
• Using the pliers UT 1803, pull the split pin (3823) out of the rear end of the locking pin
(3821) (Fig. 9.2.p).
• Gently release the pressure on the locking pin (3821) and then take it, together with the
locking spring (3822) out of the front side of the receiver frame (B1) (Fig. 9.2.p).
points :
- Lightly lubricate the locking pin (3821) and the locking spring (3822) before reinstalling
them.
- After its reinstallation, and in order to allow the reinstallation of the barrel support
(3817), the locking pin (3821) should be pushed and held back at its rear position.
Therefore, do not bend the extremities of the split pin (3823) yet : the split pin with
straight extremities will be used to hold back the locking pin (also refer to § 9.2.5 and
§ 9.2.6).
Maintenance manual
- 141 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1803 3813
.
3814 3816
3812
3813
3816
B1
3815
3813 3812
3814
Fig. 9.2.q - Removal of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring (3812)
3816 3813 3812
b
B1
a
3815
3814
3814
UT 2203
3816
B1
3813
Fig. 9.2.r - Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring (3812)
Maintenance manual
- 142 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.2.10. Removal of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring (3812)
Requirements : • UT 1039 (Combination wrench 1 1/8”)
• UT 1910 (Screwdriver 10 x 200 mm)
• Underneath the receiver frame (B1) and using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin
(3815) and then pull the pin out of the nut (3814) and the lower end of the screw (3813)
(left part of Fig. 9.2.q).
• Using the wrench UT 1039 and the screwdriver UT 1910 and taking into account that the
locking spring (3812) will be released, unscrew the nut (3814) from the screw (3813)
(Fig. 9.2.q).
• Take the screw (3813) and the breech lock cam (3816) out of the inside of the receiver
frame (B1) (Fig. 9.2.q).
9.2.11. Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (3816) and the locking spring (3812)
Requirements : • UT 1039 (Combination wrench 1 1/8”)
• UT 2203 (Feeler gauge)
• Fit the protruding bottom part (a) of the breech lock cam (3816) into the elongated
transversal hole in the bottom plate of the receiver frame (B1) and then, from the inside,
insert the screw (3813) into the hole (b) of the breech lock cam (upper parts of Fig. 9.2.r).
• From underneath, fit the locking spring (3812), with the screw hole at the front side and its
folded ends facing outwards, onto the screw (3813) and then screw the nut (3814), with its
grooves facing inwards, onto the screw (Fig. 9.2.r).
• Using the wrench UT 1039 and the screwdriver UT 1910, tighten the nut (3814) onto the
screw (3813).
Ensure that, at the end of this operation, one of the grooves of the nut (3814) is perfectly aligned
with the hole in the screw (3813).
• Using the feeler gauge UT 2203 in the middle of the notch in the bottom plate of the
receiver frame (B1), check if the clearance between the breech lock cam (3816) and the
bottom plate lays between 0.05 and 0.20 mm (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.r).
If the 0.05 mm thickness does not pass, unscrew the nut (3814) by 1/6 of a turn and then check
again.
If the 0.20 mm thickness passes, tighten the nut (3814) by 1/6 of a turn and then check again.
If it is impossible to obtain a correct clearance, replace the screw (3813).
• Insert the split pin (3815) into the aligned groove of the nut (3814) and hole of the screw
(3813) and then, using the pliers UT 1803, lock it by bending its 2 extremities (lower right
part of Fig. 9.2.r).
• Reinstall the barrel group [ 1 ], the back plate assembly (600), the driving spring assembly
Maintenance manual
- 143 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3700
b
a 3846
B1
Fig. 9.2.s - Removal of the trigger bar (3846)
3653
UT 1910
3654
500
B1
B5
3651
Fig. 9.2.t - Removal of the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) and the trigger bar stop bracket (3653)
Maintenance manual
- 144 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.12. Removal and reinstallation of the trigger bar (3846)

Although, for reasons of clarity, Fig. 9.2.s shows the receiver (3100) without trigger bar stop
assembly (B5), it is not necessary to remove this assembly.
• At the left side of the receiver frame (B1), turn the trigger bar pin (3700) in order to align its
little protruding part (a) with the notch (b) of its mounting hole in the receiver (Fig. 9.2.s).
• While holding the trigger bar (3846) in position with a finger, withdraw the trigger bar pin
(3700) (Fig. 9.2.s).
• Take the trigger bar (3846) out of the rear side of the receiver frame (B1) (Fig. 9.2.s).
points :
- When reinstalling the trigger bar (3846), ensure that it fits correctly into the inner groove
at the upper rear side of the receiver frame (B1).
- After it has been inserted fully into position, secure the trigger bar pin (3700) by turning
it.
9.2.13. Removal and reinstallation of the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) and
the trigger bar stop bracket (3653)
Requirements : • UT 1910 (Screwdriver 10 x 200 mm)
• UT 2030 (Center punch, dia. 6 mm)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Requirements of § 10.5
• Remove the trigger bar (3846) as described in § 9.2.12.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910 and taking into account that it also secures the rear end of
the rear sight assembly (500) (or (1500/1) if the machine gun is equipped with the ‘anti-
aircraft sights’-kit), take out the screw (3654) in order to remove the trigger bar stop
assembly (B5) from the inner upper rear part of the receiver frame (B1) (left part of
Fig. 9.2.t).
Take into account that the head of the screw (3654) has been staked.
• Unscrew the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) from the threaded pin of the trigger bar
stop bracket (3653) (right part of Fig. 9.2.t).
points :
- After having reassembled the trigger bar stop assembly (B5), reinstall it by proceeding as
described in § 10.5. ‘Timing adjustment’.
- After its reinstallation, secure the screw (3654) by staking its head by using the center
punch UT 2030 and the hammer UT 2111.
After any intervention on the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651), the timing of the
machine gun should be checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.5.
Maintenance manual
- 145 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3826 3854
.
.
OREA 255
UT 2012
a
B1 3825
b
3824 3854
3824
3826
3854
3825
Fig. 9.2.u - Removal of the front sight (3824), the front sight cover (3826) and the front sight base
(3854) (*)
Maintenance manual
- 146 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.2.14. Removal and reinstallation of the front sight (3824), the front sight cover
(3826) and the front sight base (3854) (*)
Requirements : • OREA 255 (Wrench, front sight)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
machine gun can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the machine gun into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• If necessary, and using the OREA 255 through the upper hole in the front sight cover
(3826), screw the front sight (3824) out of the front sight base (3854) (upper left part of
Fig. 9.2.u).
Please note that, as long as the front sight (3824) has not been screwed, the removal and
reinstallation of the assembly formed by the front sight base (3854) and the front sight will not
affect the firing precision : the present step can therefore be skipped in order to avoid the
necessity of checking and, if necessary, adjusting the firing precision of the machine gun.
Also note that, when the front sight base (3854) has been removed from the receiver frame (B1),
it is also possible to turn the front sight (3824) by using a screwdriver from underneath.
• Using the drift punch UT 2012 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the 2 spring pins
(3825) (upper right part of Fig. 9.2.u).
NOTE : Once they have been removed, the spring pins (3825) must always be replaced
by new ones !
• After the second withdrawal of the drift punch UT 2012, the front sight cover (3826) and
then the front sight base (3854) can be lifted up and off the receiver frame (B1) (Fig. 9.2.u).
points :
- If the front sight (3824) has been separated from the front sight base (3854), it can only
be reinstalled by screwing it from underneath into the front sight base.
- The front sight base (3854) should fit into the central groove (a) at the upper front side of
the receiver frame (B1) while the front sight cover (3826) should fit into the 2 outer
grooves (b) (Fig. 9.2.u).
If the front sight (3824) has been screwed, the firing precision of the machine gun
should be checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.1 and § 10.2.
9.2.15. Removal and reinstallation of the cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832)
The cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832) can be removed after having removed the feed
cover (D1) (also refer to § 9.4.1).
If they have been removed, the cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832) should be reinstalled
into their housing in the upper front side of the receiver frame (B1) before reinstalling the feed
cover (D1).
When reinstalling the cover pawl (3831), its notch should be facing outwards.
Maintenance manual
- 147 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3845 3841
3843
a
a
3844 3842
3839 b
B4
b
3840
3838
Fig. 9.2.v - Bolt latch assembly (B4)
3845 3844
.
3838
3839 UT 1803
3844 3839
.
B1
3841
OREA 558
3843
3842
3839 3844
3838
3840
3845
Fig. 9.2.w - Removal and disassembly of the bolt latch assembly (B4)
Maintenance manual
- 148 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

assembly (B4)
Requirements : • OREA 270 (Wrench, nut, bolt latch rod)
• OREA 558 (Tool, assembling, bolt latch, .50 machine gun)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
Please note that it is now possible to simply remove the bolt latch (3838) (together with its plunger
(3841) and the corresponding spring (3842)) by first removing the trigger bar (3846) (refer to
§ 9.2.12) and then pushing out the pin (3840) by using a pointed tool such as a drift punch
through the corresponding hole provided in the side plate of the receiver frame (B1).
• Remove the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) as described in § 9.2.13.
• At the rear side of the receiver frame (B1), fit the OREA 558 into the grooves for the back
plate assembly (600) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.w).
If necessary, turn the handle of the OREA 558 in order to unscrew its threaded rod so that it does
not come into contact with the receiver frame (B1) when installing the tool.
• Using its handle, screw the threaded rod of the OREA 558 inwards until it comes into
contact with the bolt latch (3838) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.w).
• Continue screwing the handle of the OREA 558 in order to push the bolt latch rod (3839),
against the force of its spring (3843), forwards until the bolt latch rod nut (3844) comes out
of the front side of the bolt latch mounting bracket and becomes easily accessible through
the feed cover opening (upper right parts of Fig. 9.2.w).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (3845) and then pull the pin out of the front
end of the bolt latch rod (3839) and its nut (3844) (upper right parts of Fig. 9.2.w).
• Using the wrench OREA 270 through the feed cover opening, loosen and then remove the
bolt latch rod nut (3844).
• Using its handle, unscrew the threaded rod of the OREA 558 (the pressure on the bolt latch
rod spring (3843) will be released) until the tool can be removed and then lift the tool up
and off the rear side of the receiver frame (B1).
• Taking care not to lose the bolt latch plunger (3841) and its spring (3842), take the
remaining parts of the bolt latch assembly (B4) out of the rear side of the bolt latch
mounting bracket (lower part of Fig. 9.2.w).
• Disassemble the bolt latch assembly (B4) as shown in the lower part of Fig. 9.2.w.
In order to separate the bolt latch rod (3839) from the bolt latch (3838), push out the pin (3840)
by using a pointed tool such as a drift punch.
Maintenance manual
- 149 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3836
3833
B1
UT 1803 3849
a
3833 B1
UT 1175 3836 3837
Fig. 9.2.x - Removal of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837)
Maintenance manual
- 150 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

assembly (B4) (continued)
points :
- When fitting the bolt latch assembly (B4) back into the rear side of the bolt latch
mounting bracket, the bolt latch (3838) will hang down : it should be raised manually in
order to be correctly engaged by the threaded rod of the OREA 558 when the tool is
used to push the bolt latch rod (3839) forwards, against the force of its spring (3843).
- When reinstalling the bolt latch rod nut (3844), first fully tighten it and then, if necessary,
loosen it slightly in order to obtain a perfect alignment of its front groove with the hole in
the front end of the bolt latch rod (3839).
9.2.17. Removal of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837)
Requirements : • UT 1175 (Open-end wrench 1/2 x 9/16”)

• At the left side of the receiver frame (B1) and using the pliers UT 1803, remove the safety
spring (3849) from the nut (3833) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.x).
• Using the wrench UT 1175, unscrew the nut (3833) from the extractor switch (3836) (lower
left part of Fig. 9.2.x).
• Through the feed cover opening, take the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837) out
of the inner left side of the receiver frame (B1) (right part of Fig. 9.2.x).
Maintenance manual
- 151 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3836 c e
3836
d 3837 f
B1
UT 1803
3833 3849
UT 1175 e
Fig. 9.2.y - Reinstallation of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837)
Maintenance manual
- 152 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.2.18. Reinstallation of the extractor switch (3836) and its spring (3837)

• Fit the extractor switch spring (3837) into position in the groove in the inner side of the left
side plate of the receiver frame (B1) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.y).
Ensure that the little curved extremity (a) of the extractor switch spring (3837) fits correctly into its
hole (b) provided in the groove (also refer to the right part of Fig. 9.2.x).
• From the inside of the receiver frame (B1), fit the extractor switch (3836) back into position
(upper parts of Fig. 9.2.y).
While pushing down the free extremity (d) of the extractor switch spring (3837) by using a tool
such as a screwdriver, locate the shoulder (c) of the extractor switch (3836) onto the extremity (d)
and then fit the pin (e) of the extractor switch into its hole (f) in the receiver frame (B1).
At the same time, fit the shoulder (c) of the extractor switch (3836) into position in the groove.
• At the left outer side of the receiver frame (B1), screw the nut (3833), with its grooves facing
outwards, onto the pin (e) of the extractor switch (3836) (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.y).
• Using the wrench UT 1175, fully tighten the nut (3833) onto the pin (e) of the extractor
switch (3836) and then loosen it by 60° (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.y).
with the hole in the pin (e) of the extractor switch (3836).
Do not tighten too much : ensure that the extractor switch (3836) can operate freely.
• Fit the safety spring (3849) into the aligned groove of the nut (3833) and hole in the pin (e)
of the extractor switch (3836) and then, using the pliers UT 1803, install the safety spring
correctly onto the nut (lower right part of Fig. 9.2.y).
• Reinstall the barrel group [ 1 ], the back plate assembly (600), the driving spring assembly
Maintenance manual
- 153 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
241
C1 a
221/13
221/14 221/19 221/24
221/15 221/20 221/25
201 221/16 221/21 221/26
221/17 221/22 221/27
221/18 221/23 221/28
a
230 b
200
b
233
Fig. 9.3.a - Barrel extension group [ 3 ]
UT 2008
C1
241
Fig. 9.3.b - Removal of the barrel locking spring blade (241)
For more information about the marks used to ensure this requirement, refer to § 7.2 and to § 9.3.3.
Maintenance manual
- 154 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.3. BARREL EXTENSION GROUP [ 3 ] (Fig. 9.3.a)
9.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (241)
As the barrel locking spring blade (241) is held into position by staking, only remove it when it is
absolutely necessary !

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the barrel extension assembly (200) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
barrel extension assembly (200) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the barrel extension assembly (200) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag
to avoid scratches.
• Using a tool such as a screwdriver at the right side of the barrel extension assembly (200),
unbend the staking which holds the barrel locking spring blade (241) into position.
• Using the drift punch UT 2008 and the hammer UT 2111, drive the barrel locking spring
blade (241) forwards out of its housing in the right side of the barrel extension body (C1)
(Fig. 9.3.b).
points (Fig. 9.3.c) :
- The barrel locking spring blade (241) should be oriented so that its lug (a) is facing
inwards.
- After having inserted the barrel locking spring blade (241) completely into its housing (b)
in the right side of the barrel extension body (C1), secure it into position by staking.
Using the center punch OREA 722 and the hammer UT 2111, stake material from the edge of
the housing (b) into the not yet used notch (c) of the barrel locking spring blade (241).
The same notch (c) should never be used twice.
b c
UT 2008
C1
a
241
241
Fig. 9.3.c - Reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (241)

Maintenance manual
- 155 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2006 UT 2004
221
.
221
C1
.
230
C1
221
233
230
Fig. 9.3.d - Removal of the breech lock (221)
OREA 870
221
.
233
Fig. 9.3.e - Installing a new spring pin (233) by using the

drift pin OREA 870
Maintenance manual
- 156 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.3. BARREL EXTENSION GROUP [ 3 ] (continued)
9.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock (221)
NOTE : Take into account that, if the breech lock (221) will be replaced by a new one, the
adjustment of the headspace should be carried out : the presently installed breech
lock will not necessarily be replaced by an identical one.
Requirements : • OREA 870 (Drift-pin, placement pin, breech lock pin)

• UT 2004 (Drift punch, dia. 5 mm, lg 40 mm)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• If necessary, requirements of § 10.4
• Remove the barrel extension assembly (200) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Using the drift punch UT 2006 and the hammer UT 2111 from underneath, drive the
spring pin (233) out of the breech lock pin (230) and into the body of the breech lock (221)
(upper left part of Fig. 9.3.d).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the spring pin (233) must always be replaced by a
new one !
• After having withdrawn the drift punch UT 2006, use the drift punch UT 2004 and, if
necessary, the hammer UT 2111 to drive the breech lock pin (230) out of the barrel
extension body (C1) (upper right part of Fig. 9.3.d).
• After having withdrawn the drift punch UT 2004, the breech lock (221) can be taken out of
its housing in the barrel extension body (C1) (lower part of Fig. 9.3.d).
Take into account that the spring pin (233) is inside the body of the breech lock (221).
points :
- Reinstall the breech lock (221) with its hole for the spring pin (233) at the lower side and
with its upper inclined locking face at the front side.
- If the previously used breech lock (221) is reinstalled again, it will not be necessary to
carry out the adjustment of the headspace.
- If the breech lock (221) should be replaced by a new one, first (before the adjustment of
the headspace) install a new breech lock which is identical (same number) to the
previous one.
After having secured the new breech lock (221) into position by using the breech lock pin
(230), carry out the adjustment of the headspace described in § 10.4.
- Use the drift pin OREA 870 to install a new spring pin (233) (Fig. 9.3.e).
Using the drift pin OREA 870 ensures a correct positioning of the spring pin (233).
- The breech lock pin (230) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
Maintenance manual
- 157 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Y B1 B1
Y
YY
YY
SY
SY
12 X X X X YYYY
UUUU
9m
YY
YY
m U
XUX U
XUX YY
YY
Upside Upside
down down
C1 C1
Fig. 9.3.f - Marking a not marked barrel extension Fig. 9.3.g - Changing an existing mark on the
body (C1) barrel extension body (C1)
Maintenance manual
- 158 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.3. BARREL EXTENSION GROUP [ 3 ] (continued)
9.3.3. Marking the barrel extension body (C1)
The bottom of the barrel extension body (C1) must be marked with the last four digits of the serial
number of the machine gun in order to ensure that the barrel extension assembly (200) is not
interchanged between different machine guns when carrying out the field stripping procedure (also
refer to the beginning of § 7.2).
It is assumed that the marking of the barrel extension body (C1) has been asked during another
procedure (normally during the adjustment of the headspace described in § 10.4).
Requirements : • Marking tools
a. The barrel extension body (C1) is not marked yet (Fig. 9.3.f)
Mark the bottom of the barrel extension body (C1) with the last four digits ‘YYYY’ of the
serial number of the machine gun.
The serial number of the machine gun has been marked in the front part of the upper rear plate
of the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on Fig 9.3.f).
The mark should start at 129 mm from the front side of the barrel extension body (C1).
It is recommended that the marked digits have a height of 5 mm and that there is a distance
of 2.5 mm between the digits and the outside edge of the barrel extension body (C1).
b. The barrel extension body (C1) has been marked but the marked digits
are not correct anymore (Fig. 9.3.g)
• Using the mark ‘I’, make a cross on each of the (wrong) four digits ‘UUUU’ presently
marked on the bottom of the barrel extension body (C1).
• Mark the correct last four digits ‘YYYY’ of the serial number of the machine gun after
the previous number combination.
of the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on Fig 9.3.g).
of 2.5 mm between the digits and the outside edge of the barrel extension body (C1).
Maintenance manual
- 159 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
f
482
483
410 481
c
b
f
484
d a
a
479
476
472
c
450 475
440
474
460
478
471 D1
430 477
D2 d
e 473 400
Fig. 9.4.a - Feed cover group [ 4 ]
D1 3832
UT 1803
.
.
.
482
D1 B1
a
B1 3831
483
482
UT 2004
Fig. 9.4.b - Removal of the feed cover (D1)
Maintenance manual
- 160 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.4. FEED COVER GROUP [ 4 ] (Fig. 9.4.a)

9.4.1. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover (D1)
Please note that, during the following procedure, the cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832) (parts
of the receiver group [ 2 ] (also refer to § 9.2.15)) will also be released.
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• UT 2203 (Feeler gauge)
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (483) and then pull it out of the left end of
the feed cover axis pin (482) (left part of Fig. 9.4.b).
• Using the drift punch UT 2004 and the hammer UT 2111 from the left side, drive out the
feed cover axis pin (482) (middle part of Fig. 9.4.b).
• Withdraw the drift punch UT 2004.
• Taking into account that it is subjected to the force of the cover pawl (3831) and its spring
(3832), open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440) and then lift it up and off
the receiver frame (B1) (middle part of Fig. 9.4.b).
• Take the cover pawl (3831) and its spring (3832) out of their housing in the receiver frame
(B1) (right part of Fig. 9.4.b).
points :
- When reinstalling the cover pawl (3831), its notch (a) should be facing outwards.
- When fitting the feed cover axis pin (482), from the right side, back into position, a light
pressure will be required on the feed cover (D1), against the force of the cover pawl
spring (3832), in order to correctly align the pin holes.
Please note that this light pressure can also be obtained by closing the feed cover (D1) before
fitting the feed cover axis pin (482) back into position.
- After having reinstalled and closed the feed cover (D1), use the feeler gauge UT 2203 in
order to check if the clearance between the feed cover latch (479) and the upper plate of
the receiver frame (B1) does not exceed 0.2 mm (Fig. 9.4.c).
If the clearance exceeds 0.2 mm, first check if the feed cover latch (479) is installed correctly. If
there is no apparent problem, the feed cover latch should be replaced by a new one.
- After having reinstalled the split pin (483), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
UT 2203
479
D1
B1
Fig. 9.4.c - Checking the clearance between the feed cover

latch (479) and the upper plate of the receiver frame (B1)
Maintenance manual
- 161 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1803
. D2
b 410
a 410 c
a
473
471
475
471
D2
d
c 474
475
b a
410
Fig. 9.4.d - Removal of the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed slide assembly (D2)
Maintenance manual
- 162 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.4. FEED COVER GROUP [ 4 ] (continued)

9.4.2. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed
slide assembly (D2)
This procedure applies to the (standard) left-hand fed MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun. In case of a
right-hand fed machine gun, refer to § 12.1.
Please note that, for this operation, it is not necessary to remove the feed cover (D1).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, pull the retaining spring (473) out of its hole in the mounting pin
(a) of the feed cover body (410) (upper left part of Fig. 9.4.d).
• Align the front end of the belt feed lever (471) with the open central part of the T-notch (b)
in the feed cover body (410) (upper right part of Fig. 9.4.d).
• Slightly slide the belt feed lever (471) off the mounting pin (a) of the feed cover body (410)
until the front end of the lever just comes out of the notch (c) in the belt feed slide assembly
(D2) (upper right part of Fig. 9.4.d).
Do not slide the belt feed lever (471) so far off the mounting pin (a) that its pin (475) (see further)
is released !
• Slide the belt feed slide assembly (D2) out of its housing in the feed cover body (410).
• Slowly slide the belt feed lever (471) further off the mounting pin (a) until the belt feed lever
pin (475) is just not released (upper right part of Fig. 9.4.d).
Please note that the belt feed lever pin (475) is subjected to the pressure of the spring (474).
• While holding back the belt feed lever pin (475) with a finger, continue sliding the belt feed
lever (471) off the mounting pin (a) until the pin is released and then take the pin, together
with the spring (474), out of their housing (d) in the belt feed lever (lower part of Fig. 9.4.d).
• Slide the belt feed lever (471) completely off the mounting pin (a) (lower part of Fig. 9.4.d).
points :
- Ensure that the belt feed lever (471) is oriented correctly (refer to Fig. 9.4.d).
- Lightly lubricate the belt feed lever pin (475) and the spring (474) before reinstalling
them.
- Fit the belt feed lever pin (475) into the spring (474) and then insert this assembly, with
the spring first, into its housing (d) in the belt feed lever (471) just before this housing is
at the same height of the edge of the feed cover body (410) when sliding the belt feed
lever back onto the mounting pin (a).
Hold the belt feed lever pin (475) in place with the screwdriver UT 1903.
- Just after the belt feed lever pin (475) has been held back, insert the belt feed slide
assembly (D2) (oriented as shown in Fig. 9.4.d) into its housing in the feed cover body
(410) and then align its notch (c) with the front end of the belt feed lever (471).
- Ensure that the front end of the belt feed lever (471) correctly engages into the notch (c)
of the belt feed slide assembly (D2) and check if both the belt feed lever and the belt feed
slide assembly can operate smoothly.
Maintenance manual
- 163 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
430
477
UT 2012
.
450
477
. 478
D2
430
460
Fig. 9.4.e - Disassembling the belt feed slide assembly (D2)
Maintenance manual
- 164 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.4.3. Disassembling and reassembling the belt feed slide assembly (D2)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the belt feed slide assembly (D2) as described in § 9.4.2.
belt feed slide assembly (D2) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the belt feed slide assembly (D2) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2012 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the pin (460) (left part
of Fig. 9.4.e).
• While firmly holding the assembly formed by the belt feed pawl (430) and its arm (477) in
position with a finger, withdraw the drift punch UT 2012.
• Gently release and then remove the assembly formed by the belt feed pawl (430) and its
arm (477) together with the pawl spring (478) from the belt feed slide (450) (middle part of
Fig. 9.4.e).
• Separate the belt feed pawl (430) and its arm (477) (right part of Fig. 9.4.e).
points :
- The wider extremity of the L-shaped pawl spring (478) should correctly engage its
housing in the belt feed pawl (430) while the other extremity of the spring should
correctly fit into the notch provided in the belt feed slide (450).
On the other hand, the L-shaped pawl spring (478) should be oriented so that its body is
at the side of the belt feed pawl arm (477).
- The pin (460) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
Maintenance manual
- 165 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
472
.
a
472
.
410 410
b
c
b UT 1913
Fig. 9.4.f - Removal of the feed cover latch spring (472)
UT 1913
476 a
c b
.
a .
.
410 b
476
410 d
Fig. 9.4.g - Removal of the extractor spring (476)
Maintenance manual
- 166 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.4.4. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch spring (472)

• Remove the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed slide assembly (D2) as described in
§ 9.4.2.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, disengage the front claw (a) of the feed cover latch spring
(472) from the groove (b) in the feed cover body (410) (left part of Fig. 9.4.f).
• Move the feed cover latch spring (472) forwards so that it can be released from the
mounting pin (c) of the feed cover body (410) and then remove it (right part of Fig. 9.4.f).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the front claw
(a) of the feed cover latch spring (472) should correctly engage the groove (b) in the feed cover
body (410).
9.4.5. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor spring (476)


§ 9.4.2.
• Remove the feed cover latch spring (472) as described in § 9.4.4.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, disengage the rear lug (a) of the extractor spring (476)
from the notch (b) in the extractor guide cam (c) of the feed cover body (410) (left part of
Fig. 9.4.g).
• Disengage the front end of the extractor spring (476) from the mounting pin (d) of the feed
cover body (410) and then remove the extractor spring (right part of Fig. 9.4.g).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the rear end of
the extractor spring (476) should be depressed in order to enable its rear lug (a) to correctly
engage the notch (b) in the extractor guide cam (c) of the feed cover body (410).
Maintenance manual
- 167 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
484 481
a 472
UT 1803
479
.
440
484 .
410
440
Fig. 9.4.h - Removal of the feed cover latch shaft (440) and the feed cover latch (479)
Maintenance manual
- 168 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.4.6. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch shaft (440) and the feed
cover latch (479)
This procedure applies to the (standard) case that the feed cover latch shaft (440) is installed at the
left side of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun. In case of a right mounting, refer to § 12.3.
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (484) and then pull it out of the right end of
the feed cover latch shaft (440) (left part of Fig. 9.4.h).
• Taking care not to lose the washer (481) and taking into account that the feed cover latch
(479) will be released, pull the feed cover latch shaft (440) out of the left side of the feed
cover body (410) (right part of Fig. 9.4.h).
points :
- Ensure that the feed cover latch (479) is oriented correctly (refer to Fig. 9.4.h).
- Ensure that the pointed front part of the feed cover latch (479) fits correctly between the
rear end of its spring (472) and the feed cover body (410).
- When fitting the feed cover latch shaft (440), from the left side, back into position, a light
pressure will be required on the feed cover latch (479), against the force of its spring
(472), in order to correctly align the pin holes.
- Before reinstalling the split pin (484), fit the washer (481), in the notch (a) of the feed
cover body (410), onto the right end of the feed cover latch shaft (440).
Maintenance manual
- 169 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
870
831
865
863
823 c
e
d
840
844 867
862
843 E1 e
d
f 820
868 864
c
842
E2
866
a 853 850
861
852
b
b
a
E3
810
800
Fig. 9.5.a - Bolt group [ 5 ]
For more information about the marks used to ensure this requirement, refer to § 7.2 and to § 9.5.9.
For the removal and the reinstallation of the driving spring assembly (870), proceed as
described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1 and § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 170 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5. BOLT GROUP [ 5 ] (Fig. 9.5.a)
9.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor/ejector assembly (840)
• Remove the bolt assembly (810) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• The extractor/ejector assembly (840) can simply be removed by first raising it to the vertical
position and then taking it out of its housing in the left side of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.b).
points :
- The hinge pin (a) of the extractor/ejector assembly (840), which should be pushed fully
into the bolt (820), is also used to lock the bolt switch (831) into position.
- After its reinstallation, check if the extractor/ejector assembly (840) can move freely to the
horizontal position.
9.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt switch (831)

• Remove the extractor/ejector assembly (840) as described in § 9.5.1.
• The bolt switch (831) can now simply be lifted up and out of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.c).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the orientation
of the bolt switch (831) is different for a left-hand or a right-hand fed machine gun (also refer
to § 2.2.5 and/or to § 12.1) and that the pin (823) should correctly engage the corresponding
hole in the bolt switch.
831
831
.
820
820
840
.
831
823
a
Fig. 9.5.b - Removal of the extractor/ejector

assembly (840)
Fig. 9.5.c - Removal of the bolt switch (831)
Maintenance manual
- 171 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
865
.
820
.
866
Fig. 9.5.d - Removal of the cocking lever (865) and its

pin (866)
867
867
.
820
868
820
820
868
.
Fig. 9.5.e - Removal of the firing pin spring stop (868) and the lock (867)
Maintenance manual
- 172 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5. BOLT GROUP [ 5 ] (continued)
9.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking lever (865) and its pin (866)
Requirements : • Drift punch or similar tool
• If not already done, pull the cocking lever (865) completely rearwards and then, with the tip
of a screwdriver or a similar tool, push down on the sear (863) in order to release the firing
pin (861) (also refer to § 7.1).
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch from the right side, push the cocking lever pin
(866) out of the left side of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.d).
• Lift the cocking lever (865) up and out of its housing in the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.d).
points :
- The cocking lever (865) should be fitted into its housing in the bolt (820) while holding it
as shown in Fig. 9.5.d.
- After having reinstalled the cocking lever (865), check if the bolt assembly (810) operates
correctly : first cock the firing pin (861) by pushing the cocking lever forwards, move the
upper end of the cocking lever back rearwards and then check if the firing pin is correctly
released when pushing down on the sear (863).
9.5.4. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin spring stop (868) and the lock
(867)
• When not using tip of cocking lever, UT 1903 (Screwdriver 3 x 75 mm)
• Remove the cocking lever (865) as described in § 9.5.3.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1903 (or the tip of the cocking lever (865)), release the rear end
of the lock (867) from its groove in the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.e).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1903 (or the tip of the cocking lever (865)), disengage the front
end of the lock (867) from the upper end of the firing pin spring stop (868) and then lift the
lock up and out of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.e).
• Take the firing pin spring stop (868) out of the bottom of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.e).
points :
- The firing pin spring stop (868) must be reinserted so that it passes through the groove in
the firing pin extension body (E3) and behind the rear coil of the firing pin spring (852).
- Reinstall the lock (867) with its concave side facing upwards, fit its fork-shaped front end
onto the recess in the upper end of the firing pin spring stop (868) and engage its rear
end into the corresponding groove in the bolt (820).
correctly as described in § 9.5.3.
Maintenance manual
- 173 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
820 863
.
.
820
864
. 863
.
a 864
b 862
Fig. 9.5.f - Removal of the sear slide (864), the sear (863) and its spring (862)
820
E2
Fig. 9.5.g - Removal of the firing pin assembly (E2)
Maintenance manual
- 174 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5.5. Removal and reinstallation of the sear slide (864), the sear (863) and its
spring (862)
• Remove the firing pin spring stop (868) and the lock (867) as described in § 9.5.4.
• Using the tip of a screwdriver or a similar tool, push down on the sear (863) until its lug (a)
has completely disengaged the notch (b) of the sear slide (864) and then, from the left side,
pull the sear slide out of its housing in the rear side of the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.f).
• Release the sear (863).
• Lift the sear (863) and its spring (862) up and out of their housing at the rear side of the
bolt (820) (right part of Fig. 9.5.f).
points :
- The sear (863) should be reinstalled with its lug (a) facing rearwards.
- In order to facilitate the reinstallation of the sear spring (862), it is recommended to hold
it by fitting the tip of a screwdriver (or the tip of the cocking lever (865)) between its coils.
9.5.6. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin assembly (E2)

• Remove the firing pin spring stop (868) and the lock (867) as described in § 9.5.4.
• Remove the sear (863) as described in § 9.5.5.
• The firing pin assembly (E2) can now simply be pulled out of its housing at the rear side of
the bolt (820) (Fig. 9.5.g).
points :
- If desired, the firing pin assembly (E2) can be disassembled and reassembled as
described in § 9.5.8.
- The firing pin assembly (E2) should be reinstalled so that the flat part of its rear end is
facing downwards.
Maintenance manual
- 175 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2008 E1
E1
.
842
843 842
844 844
Fig. 9.5.h - Disassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (840)
Maintenance manual
- 176 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5.7. Disassembling and reassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (840)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
extractor/ejector assembly (840) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the extractor/ejector assembly (840) into a vice, fix it by the body of the
extractor (E1) and use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2008 and the hammer UT 2111 from the left side, drive out the
pin (844) (left part of Fig. 9.5.h).
Take into account that the left extremity of the pin (844) has been staked.
• While holding the ejector (842) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift punch UT 2008.
• Gently release and then remove the ejector (842) together with its spring (843) out of their
housing in the extractor (E1) (right part of Fig. 9.5.h).
points :
- The ejector spring (843) should fit into its housing in the extractor (E1) with its unbent
extremity first.
- After its reinstallation, secure the pin (844) by staking its left extremity by using the center
punch OREA 722 and the hammer UT 2111.
Maintenance manual
- 177 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
852 UT 2012
850
.
861
850
OREA 269
853
E3
852
Fig. 9.5.i - Disassembling the firing pin assembly (E2)
Maintenance manual
- 178 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5.8. Disassembling and reassembling the firing pin assembly (E2)
Requirements : • OREA 269 (Rod, firing pin spring)

• Drift punch or similar tool
• Remove the firing pin assembly (E2) as described in § 9.5.6.
firing pin assembly (E2) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the firing pin assembly (E2) into a vice, fix it by the firing pin extension (850)
and use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Disengage the firing pin (861) from the front end of the firing pin extension (850) (upper left
part of Fig. 9.5.i).
• Fit the OREA 269 onto the front end of the firing pin extension (850) in order to compress
the firing pin spring (852) and to release the pressure on the pin (853) (upper right part of
Fig. 9.5.i).
• Using the drift punch UT 2012, drive out the pin (853) (upper right part of Fig. 9.5.i).
• Remove the OREA 269 and then take the firing pin spring (852) out of the firing pin
extension body (E3) (lower part of Fig. 9.5.i).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the pin (853)
should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
Maintenance manual
- 179 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
B1 B1
Y
Y
YY
YY
SY
SY
ZZ ZZ
221 221
C1 C1
YYYY
U
XU
YY
YY
XXXX XX
UUUU-VV-ZZ
YY
YY- 20 XU
XUX -V
ZZ
5m XVX -ZZ
m
820 820
Fig. 9.5.j - Marking a not marked bolt (820) Fig. 9.5.k - Changing an existing mark on the bolt
(820)
Maintenance manual
- 180 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.5.9. Marking the bolt (820)

The upper front part of the bolt (820) must be marked with the last four digits of the serial number of
the machine gun as well as the number of the presently used breech lock (221) in order to ensure
that the bolt assembly (810) is not interchanged between different machine guns when carrying out
the field stripping procedure (also refer to the beginning of § 7.2).
It is assumed that the marking of the bolt (820) has been asked during another procedure (normally
during the adjustment of the headspace described in § 10.4).
Requirements : • Marking tools
a. The bolt (820) is not marked yet (Fig. 9.5.j)
Mark the upper front part of the bolt (820) with the number combination ‘YYYY-ZZ’ where
‘YYYY’ represents the last four digits of the serial number of the machine gun and ‘ZZ’
represents the number of the breech lock (221) presently installed in the barrel extension
body (C1).
of the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on Fig 9.5.j).
The number of the breech lock (221) has been marked in its cavity (‘ZZ’ on Fig. 9.5.j).
The mark should start at 205 mm from the rear side of the bolt (820).
of 6 mm between the digits and the outside edge of the bolt (820).
b. The bolt (820) has been marked but the marked number combination is
not correct anymore (Fig. 9.5.k)
If the ‘serial number’-part of the number combination is not correct anymore, proceed as
follows :
• Using the mark ‘I’, make a cross on each of the (wrong) four digits ‘UUUU’ presently
marked on the upper front part of the bolt (820).
• Mark the correct last four digits ‘YYYY’ of the serial number of the machine gun at the
right side of the previous number combination.
of the receiver frame (B1) (‘SYYYY’ on Fig 9.5.k).
of 1.5 mm between the digits and the outside edge of the bolt (820).
If the ‘breech lock number’-part of the number combination is not correct anymore,
proceed as follows :
• Using the mark ‘I’, make a cross on each of the (wrong) two digits ‘VV’ presently
marked on the upper front part of the bolt (820).
• Starting with a hyphen ‘-’, mark the correct two digits ‘ZZ’ representing the number of
the presently used breech lock (221) after the previous number combination.
The number of the breech lock (221) has been marked in its cavity (‘ZZ’ on Fig. 9.5.k).
of 6 mm between the digits and the outside edge of the bolt (820).
Maintenance manual
- 181 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
e
523
528
520 e
529 525
d
526 524
d
522 527
548
a
521 545
c
551
547
b
546
a
510
542 b
c 543
541 544
549
500
Fig. 9.6.a - Rear sight group [ 6 ] (*)
After any intervention on the rear sight group [ 6 ], the firing precision of the machine gun should be
checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.1 and § 10.2.
Maintenance manual
- 182 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.6. REAR SIGHT GROUP [ 6 ] (*) (Fig. 9.6.a)

9.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight assembly (500)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the back plate assembly (600) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910 and taking into account that it also secures the trigger bar
stop assembly (B5) (also refer to § 9.2.13), take out the screw (3654) which secures the
rear part of the rear sight assembly (500) to the receiver frame (B1).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, take out the 2 screws (551) which secure the front part of
the rear sight assembly (500) to the receiver frame (B1) (left part of Fig. 9.6.b).
Take into account that the heads of the screws (551) have been staked.
• Lift the rear sight assembly (500) up and off the receiver frame (B1) (right part of
Fig. 9.6.b).
points :
- Ensure that the positioning pins (a) underneath the rear sight assembly (500) fit correctly
into the corresponding holes (b) provided in the upper plate of the receiver frame (B1).
- Reinstall the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) by proceeding as described in
‘10.5. Adjustment of the timing’.
- After their reinstallation, secure the screws (3654) and (551) by staking their heads by
using the center punch UT 2030 and the hammer UT 2111.
B1 500
UT 1910
a
.
b b
551
500
B1
Fig. 9.6.b - Removal of the rear sight assembly (500)
After any intervention on the trigger bar stop assembly (B5), the timing of the machine gun should be
checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.5.
Maintenance manual
- 183 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2005
544
542
543
.
541
545
541
.
542
Fig. 9.6.c - Removal of the rear sight windage knob (541)
520
520
510
545 549
. 510
546
545
UT 1913
546
Fig. 9.6.d - Removal of the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) and the rear sight leaf assembly
(520)
Maintenance manual
- 184 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.6. REAR SIGHT GROUP [ 6 ] (*) (continued)
9.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight leaf assembly (520), the rear
sight windage knob (541) and the rear sight windage adjusting screw
(545)
Please note that, for this operation, it is not necessary to remove the rear sight assembly (500).
Requirements : • UT 1913 (Screwdriver 5.5 x 150 mm)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
of Fig. 9.6.c).
one !
• After having withdrawn the drift punch UT 2005 and taking into account that the windage
click plunger (543) and its spring (544) will be released, pull the rear sight windage knob
(541) off the left end of the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) (right part of
Fig. 9.6.c).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913 from the right side and taking into account that both the
rear sight leaf assembly (520) and the rear sight leaf stop (546) will be released, completely
unscrew the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) out of the rear sight base (510) (left
part of Fig. 9.6.d).
During this operation, it is recommended to push down slightly on the rear sight leaf assembly
(520) as the latter is subjected to the force of the rear sight base spring (549).
• Lift the rear sight leaf assembly (520) up and off the rear sight base (510) (right part of
Fig. 9.6.d).
• If it did not come out yet, take the rear sight leaf stop (546) out of its hole in the right side
of the rear sight base (510).
points :
- The rear sight leaf stop (546) should be fitted, from the outside and with its narrower end
first, into its hole in the right side of the rear sight base (510).
- When fitting the rear sight leaf assembly (520) back into position, ensure that its
graduations are facing rearwards.
- When screwing the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545), from the right side, back
into position, a light downward pressure will be required on the rear sight leaf assembly
(520), against the force of the rear sight base spring (549), in order to correctly align the
screw holes.
Ensure that the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) fits correctly and completely into the
hole in the left side of the rear sight base (510).
Maintenance manual
- 185 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1903
510
548
547
548
Fig. 9.6.e - Removal of the rear sight windage scale (547)
UT 2111 UT 2004
549
510
.
Fig. 9.6.f - Removal of the rear sight base spring (549)
Maintenance manual
- 186 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight leaf assembly (520), the rear
(545) (continued)
- When reinstalling the windage click plunger (543), first fit it onto its spring (544) and
then insert this assembly, slightly lubricated and with the free extremity of the spring first,
into the hole in the right side of the rear sight windage knob (541).
- If it is difficult to insert the pin (542), use the drift punch UT 2005 to assist to align the
holes in the rear sight windage knob (541) with the corresponding hole in the left end of
the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545).
9.6.3. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight windage scale (547)

• Using the screwdriver UT 1903, take out the 2 screws (548) which secure the rear sight
windage scale (547) to the rear sight base (510) (Fig. 9.6.e).
• Remove the rear sight windage scale (547) (Fig. 9.6.e).
9.6.4. Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight base spring (549)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the rear sight leaf assembly (520) as described in § 9.6.2.
• Remove the rear sight windage scale (547) as described in § 9.6.3.
• Using the drift punch UT 2004 and the hammer UT 2111, disengage the rear sight base
spring (549) from its housing in the rear sight base (510) (Fig. 9.6.f).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order taking into account that the rear sight
base spring (549), which should be lightly lubricated before its reinstallation, should fit
completely into its housing in the rear sight base (510).
Maintenance manual
- 187 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
522 OREA 798 521

525
523 524
529
.
525
528
Fig. 9.6.g - Removal of the rear sight slide elevating knob (523)
OREA 798
b
524
522
. 526 .
524
521
.
a
b
527
522
524
521
527
Fig. 9.6.h - Removal of the rear sight slide (522), the rear sight slide elevating screw (524) and the rear
sight half nut (527)
Maintenance manual
- 188 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.6.5. Disassembly and reassembly of the rear sight leaf assembly (520)
Requirements : • OREA 798 (Drift, 1.2 x 10 mm dia.)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the rear sight leaf assembly (520) as described in § 9.6.2.
• Position, if it has not already been done, the rear sight slide (522) at its lowest position.
rear sight leaf assembly (520) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the rear sight leaf assembly (520) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch OREA 798 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the pin (525) (left
part of Fig. 9.6.g).
Take into account that both extremities of the pin (525) have been staked.
one !
• After having withdrawn the drift punch OREA 798 and taking into account that the
elevating plunger (528) and its spring (529) will be released, pull the rear sight slide
elevating knob (523) off the end of the corresponding screw (524) (right part of Fig. 9.6.g).
• Take the elevating plunger (528) and its spring (529) out of their housing in the rear sight
leaf (521) (right part of Fig. 9.6.g).
• Using the drift punch OREA 798 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the pin (526) (upper
left part of Fig. 9.6.h).
Take into account that both extremities of the pin (526) have been staked.
one !
• After having withdrawn the drift punch OREA 798, completely unscrew the rear sight slide
elevating screw (524) and then take it out of its housing in the rear sight leaf (521) (upper
right part of Fig. 9.6.h).
• Using a tool like a drift punch from the left side and through the hole provided in the left
side of the rear sight leaf (521), push the rear sight half nut (527) out of the right side of the
rear sight leaf (upper right part of Fig. 9.6.h).
• After having withdrawn the tool, the rear sight slide (522) can simply be separated from the
rear sight leaf (521) (lower part of Fig. 9.6.h).
Maintenance manual
- 189 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 190 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.6.5. Disassembly and reassembly of the rear sight leaf assembly (520)
(continued)
points :
- When fitting the rear sight slide (522) back into the rear sight leaf (521), ensure that its
peep-hole (‘a’ on the lower part of Fig. 9.6.h) is facing rearwards and slide it towards the
base of the rear sight leaf.
- When inserting the rear sight half nut (527) from the right side, back into position, ensure
that its teeth are at the right side and push it all the way into the rear sight slide (522).
- When screwing the rear sight slide elevating screw (524) back into position, ensure that
its thread correctly engages the teeth at the right side of the rear sight half nut (527) and
never apply too much force.
- The pin (526) can only be inserted back into position if the recess (‘b’ on the lower part
of Fig. 9.6.h) in the rear sight slide elevating screw (524) is correctly aligned with the
corresponding holes in the rear sight leaf (521).
- After its reinstallation, secure the pin (526) by staking its 2 extremities by using the center
- When reinstalling the elevating plunger (528), first fit it into its spring (529) and then
insert this assembly, slightly lubricated and with the free extremity of the spring first, into
the hole in the rear sight leaf (521).
- If it is difficult to insert the pin (525), use the drift punch OREA 798 to assist to align the
holes in the rear sight slide elevating knob (523) with the corresponding hole in the end
of the rear sight slide elevating screw (524).
- After its reinstallation, secure the pin (525) by staking its 2 extremities by using the center
Maintenance manual
- 191 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
913 912
b
c
b 910
962 a
G1
c
a 961
912
950
940
963
G2
930 922
d
921
925
920
924
900
Fig. 9.7.a - Buffer group [ 7 ]
G1
.
961
Fig. 9.7.b - Removal of the buffer body lock (961)
Maintenance manual
- 192 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.7. BUFFER GROUP [ 7 ] (Fig. 9.7.a)
9.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer body lock (961)

Only remove the buffer body lock (961) when it is absolutely necessary !
Requirements : • UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)

• Drift punch or similar tool
• Remove the buffer group (900) and then separate the assembly formed by the buffer body
assembly (910) and the accelerator (962) and its pin (950) as described for ‘field stripping’
in § 7.1.
buffer body assembly (910) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the buffer body assembly (910) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using a drift punch and the hammer UT 2111, drive the buffer body lock (961) rearwards
out of its housing in the right side of the buffer body (G1) (Fig. 9.7.b).
It is possible that the buffer body lock (961) is held into position by staking. In such a case, first
unbend the staking by using a tool such as a drift punch or a screwdriver.
points (Fig. 9.7.c) :
- The buffer body lock (961) should be oriented so that its rear end comes slightly out of its
housing (a) in the right side of the buffer body (G1)
- Ensure that the buffer body lock (961) is inserted completely into its housing (a) in the
right side of the buffer body (G1).
- If, and only if, the (previous) buffer body lock (961) was held into position by staking, it
(the new one) should also be secured by staking.
In such a case, and using the center punch OREA 722 and the hammer UT 2111, stake
material from the edge of the housing (a) into a not yet used notch of the buffer body lock
(961).
When staking, the same notch should never be used twice.
G1
.
a
961
Fig. 9.7.c - Reinstallation of the buffer body lock (961)
Maintenance manual
- 193 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
G1
.
950
962 950 962
Fig. 9.7.d - Removal of the accelerator (962)
G1
912
912 913
Fig. 9.7.e - Removal of the breech lock depressors (912)
a 912
OREA 848 913
OREA 848
G1
Fig. 9.7.f - Reinstalling the breech lock depressors (912) by using the riveting clamp OREA 848
Maintenance manual
- 194 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.7. BUFFER GROUP [ 7 ] (continued)

9.7.2. Removal and reinstallation of the accelerator (962)
• Remove the buffer group (900) and then separate the assembly formed by the buffer body
assembly (910) and the accelerator (962) and its pin (950) as described for ‘field stripping’
in § 7.1.
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch, push the accelerator pin (950) out of the buffer
body (G1) and then release the accelerator (962) from the buffer body (Fig. 9.7.d).
points :
- The claws of the accelerator (962) should be at the front side and be pointing upwards.
- The accelerator pin (950) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
9.7.3. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock depressors (912)

As the breech lock depressors (912) are held into position by riveting, only remove them when it is
absolutely necessary !
Always replace the breech lock depressors (912) as a pair.
Requirements : • OREA 848 (Riveting clamp depressor, breech, lock)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Chisel or similar tool
• Remove the accelerator (962) as described in § 9.7.2.
buffer body (G1) should be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the buffer body (G1) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
• Using a tool such as a chisel or a drift punch and the hammer UT 2111 from the outside,
drive out the 2 rivets (913) and then take the breech lock depressors (912) out of their
housings in the buffer body (G1) (Fig. 9.7.e).
If it is difficult to release a breech lock depressor (912) from its housing, carefully use the hammer
UT 2111.
points :
- The rivets (913) should be inserted into their holes from the inside of the buffer body
(G1).
- Before riveting the rivets (913), secure their heads temporarily into position by using the
riveting clamp OREA 848 as shown in Fig. 9.7.f.
After having inserted the rivets (913), from the inside, into their holes, fit the riveting clamp
OREA 848 into the large slot at the front side of the buffer body (G1) and then secure the tool
into position by fitting its pin (a) through the mounting holes for the accelerator pin (950).
- The breech lock depressors (912) should be oriented so that the shouldered face on their
front extremity is facing upwards (Fig. 9.7.f).
- Rivet the outer extremities of the rivets (913) by using the drift punch UT 2004 and the
hammer UT 2111 and then file off any protruding material.
Maintenance manual
- 195 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
b a
.
963
920
930
963
OREA 574
Fig. 9.7.g - Using the tool OREA 574 to disassemble the barrel buffer assembly (920)
921 G2
925
963 921
UT 1184
G2
940
Fig. 9.7.h - Disassembled components of the Fig. 9.7.i - Screwing the buffer piston assembly
barrel buffer assembly (920) (G2) out of the barrel buffer tube (921)
c 924
930
930
UT 1803
924
921
925
1682
922
Fig. 9.7.j - Disassembled components of the buffer Fig. 9.7.k - Adjusting the distance between the
piston assembly (G2) buffer piston head (924) and the front nose of the
buffer piston rod (930)
Maintenance manual
- 196 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.7. BUFFER GROUP [ 7 ] (continued)

9.7.4. Disassembly and reassembly of the barrel buffer assembly (920)
Requirements : • OREA 574 (Tool, MI.50 buffer spring)
• If required, UT 1184 (Open-end wrench 13/16 x 7/8”)
• If required, UT 1803 (Half-round nose pliers)
• If required, 1682 (Gauge, checking, piston head)
• Remove the barrel buffer assembly (920) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Insert the barrel buffer assembly (920) into the tool OREA 574 so that the front nose of the
buffer piston rod (930) engages the nose inside the tool (left part of Fig. 9.7.g).
• While pushing down the lever (a) of the tool OREA 574 in order to compress the buffer
spring (963), rotate the knob (b) of the tool by 90° (middle part of Fig. 9.7.g).
As a result, the buffer piston rod (930) will be rotated so that its protruding retaining pins become
aligned with the notches in the buffer spring guide (940).
• Slowly release the pressure on the lever (a) of the tool OREA 574 in order to release the
pressure on the buffer spring (963) (right part of Fig. 9.7.g).
During this operation, the buffer spring guide (940) will be released from the front end of the
buffer piston rod (930).
• Take the disassembled barrel buffer assembly (920) out of the tool OREA 574.
The barrel buffer assembly (920) is now disassembled into the buffer spring guide (940), the
buffer spring (963) and the assembly formed by the buffer piston assembly (G2) and the barrel
buffer tube (921) (Fig. 9.7.h).
• If required, disassemble the assembly formed by the buffer piston assembly (G2) and the
barrel buffer tube (921) by proceeding as follows :
- Fix the barrel buffer tube (921) by its rear flat ends into a vice (Fig. 9.7.i).
- Using the wrench UT 1184 on the buffer tube cap (925), screw the buffer piston
assembly (G2) out of the barrel buffer tube (921) (Fig. 9.7.i).
- Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (922) and then pull it out of the rear end
of the buffer piston rod (930) (Fig. 9.7.j).
- Unscrew the buffer piston head (924) and then slide the buffer tube cap (925) from the
rear end of the buffer piston rod (930) (Fig. 9.7.j).
points :
- Before fitting the split pin (922) back into position, adjust the distance between the front
side of the buffer piston head (924) and the front nose (c) of the buffer piston rod (930)
by using the GO end of the piston head checking gauge (1682) as shown in Fig. 9.7.k.
After this adjustment, ensure that the NO GO end of the piston head checking gauge (1682)
cannot fit.
- When reassembling the barrel buffer assembly (920) by using the tool OREA 574, ensure
that the front nose of the buffer piston rod (930) correctly engages the nose inside the
tool.
Push down the lever of the tool in order to fit the buffer spring guide (940) onto the front end of
the buffer piston rod (930) (the notches in the guide will pass over the protruding retaining pins
of the rod). After that, turn the knob of the tool by 90° so that the guide is held back by the
retaining pins of the rod when the lever of the tool is released.
Maintenance manual
- 197 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
c 735
723
e e
722 730
a
719
728
726 717
717 713
b d
719
721
711
c 717
719
716/1 715
728
a
727
735
H2
718 724
b
712
d
714
H1
700
725
Fig. 9.8.a - Cocking handle group [ 8 ]
UT 1802 B1
728 UT 1802
735
H1
726
727 728 735
Fig. 9.8.b - Removal of the 2 wires (735)
Maintenance manual
- 198 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.8. COCKING HANDLE GROUP [ 8 ] (Fig. 9.8.a)
9.8.1. Removal of the cocking handle assembly (H1)

This procedure applies to the (standard) case that the cocking handle assembly (H1) is installed at the
right side of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun. In case of a left mounting, refer to § 12.2.

• UT 1802 (Cutting pliers)
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1802 at the rear side of the cocking handle assembly (H1),
remove the wire (735) from the (upper) screw (728) and the (lower) screw (727) (left part of
Fig. 9.8.b).
• Again using the cutting pliers UT 1802, remove the wire (735) between the other screw
(728) and the cocking slide stud (726) (right part of Fig. 9.8.b).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the 2 split pins (719) which secure the nuts (717) of the
2 shoulder bolts (718) and then pull the pins out of the right end of the shoulder bolts (left
part of Fig. 9.8.c).
• Using the wrench UT 1180, unscrew the nuts (717) from the 2 shoulder bolts (718) and
then, from the inside of the receiver frame (B1), release and remove the 2 shoulder bolts
(right part of Fig. 9.8.c).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, take out the screw (727) and the 2 screws (728) and then
release and remove the cocking handle assembly (H1) from the right side of the receiver
frame (B1) (also refer to Fig. 9.8.b).
Although they are of the same type, the screw (727) is shorter than the 2 screws (728).
UT 1803
719 B1
718
UT 1180
H1
H1 717
Fig. 9.8.c - Removal of the 2 shoulder bolts (718)
For the removal and the reinstallation of the bolt stud (725), proceed as described for ‘field
stripping’ in § 7.1 and § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 199 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1180 UT 1803
719 B1
718
H1
H1 717
UT 1808
B1
728 H1
728
727
735 735 726
Fig. 9.8.d - Reinstallation of the cocking handle assembly (H1)
Maintenance manual
- 200 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.8. COCKING HANDLE GROUP [ 8 ] (continued)
9.8.2. Reinstallation of the cocking handle assembly (H1) (Fig. 9.8.d)


• UT 1808 (Lock wire pliers)
• Reinstall the cocking handle assembly (H1) onto the right side of the receiver frame (B1)
and fix it by screwing the (shorter) screw (727) and the 2 (longer) screws (728) manually
back into position.
Please note that the (shorter) screw (727) is used at the lower rear side.
• From the inside of the receiver frame (B1), fit the 2 shoulder bolts (718) back into position.
Ensure that the rectangular heads of the shoulder bolts (718) fit correctly into the corresponding
recesses provided inside the receiver frame (B1), taking into account that both the recesses and
the heads have chamfered edges which must be facing each other.
Ensure that the right extremities of the 2 shoulder bolts (718) fit correctly into the corresponding
holes in the cocking slide bracket (711).
• While holding the rectangular heads of the 2 shoulder bolts (718) in position with the
fingers, screw a nut (717), with its grooves facing outwards, onto the right extremity of each
shoulder bolt.
• Using the wrench UT 1180, tighten the 2 nuts (717) onto the shoulder bolts (718).
Ensure that, at the end of this operation, one of the grooves of the nuts (717) is perfectly aligned
with the hole in the right end of the corresponding shoulder bolt (718).
• For each shoulder bolt (718) and using the pliers UT 1803, fit a split pin (719) into the
aligned groove of the corresponding nut (717) and the hole in the right end of the bolt.
• Using the pliers UT 1803, lock both split pins (719) by bending their 2 extremities.
• Firmly tighten the screws (727) and (728) with the screwdriver UT 1913.
• Using a wire (735) and the lock wire pliers UT 1808 at the rear side of the cocking handle
assembly (H1), secure the (upper) screw (728) and the (lower) screw (727).
The lockwire should be installed so that, when tension is applied to it, this results in a tightening
(and not a loosening) effort on the screws.
• Again using a wire (735) and the lock wire pliers UT 1808, secure the other screw (728)
and the cocking slide stud (726).
The lockwire should be installed so that, when tension is applied to it, this results in a tightening
(and not a loosening) effort on the screw and the stud.
Maintenance manual
- 201 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1803
730
719 713
717
715
714
716/1
Fig. 9.8.e - Removal of the assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713)
and the cocking handle (730) as well as the cocking handle spring (716/1)
730 730
UT 1180
713
b
716/1
713 a
714
724
Fig. 9.8.f - Separating the cocking slide lever
(713) and the cocking handle (730)
Fig. 9.8.g - Correct installation of the cocking

handle spring (716/1)
Maintenance manual
- 202 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.8.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide lever (713), the cocking
handle (730) and the cocking handle spring (716/1)
Please note that, although the cocking handle assembly (H1) has been removed on the illustrations of
this paragraph, it is not necessary to remove it for this operation.

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (719) which secures the nut (717) to the
right end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) and then pull the pin out of the stud
(Fig. 9.8.e).
• Using the wrench UT 1180 and taking care not to lose the washer (715), unscrew the nut
(717) from the right end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) (Fig. 9.8.e).
• Taking into account that the cocking handle spring (716/1) will be released, slide the
assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730) as well as
the cocking handle spring itself off the right end of the cocking slide lever stud (714)
(Fig. 9.8.e).
assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730) can
be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the assembly into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Using the wrench UT 1180, unscrew the cocking handle (730) from the cocking slide lever
(713) (Fig. 9.8.f).
Take into account that the threaded end of the cocking handle (730) has been staked.
points :
- After having screwed and tightened the cocking handle (730) into the cocking slide lever
(713), secure the handle by staking its threaded end by using the center punch UT 2030
and the hammer UT 2111.
- When reinstalling the cocking handle spring (716/1), ensure that its loop (a) fits correctly
onto the cocking slide stop pin (724) and that its bent extremity fits correctly into the hole
(b) provided in the cocking slide lever (713) (Fig. 9.8.g).
- When screwing the nut (717) back onto the cocking slide lever stud (714), do not forget
the washer (715) and ensure that the grooves of the nut are facing outwards.
- When the nut (717) has been screwed completely home, one of its grooves should be
perfectly aligned with the hole in the right end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) in
order to enable the installation of the split pin (719).
Maintenance manual
- 203 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1910 714
UT 1180
724
712
712
Fig. 9.8.h - Removal of the cocking slide stop pin Fig. 9.8.i - Separating the cocking slide lever stud
(724) (714) and the cocking slide (712)
Maintenance manual
- 204 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.8.4. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the cocking slide

assembly (H2)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730)
as well as the cocking handle spring (716/1) as described in § 9.8.3.
• Taking into account that the cocking slide assembly (H2) will be released, remove the
remaining part of the cocking handle assembly (H1) as described in § 9.8.1.
cocking slide assembly (H2) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the cocking slide assembly (H2) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, unscrew the cocking slide stop pin (724) from the cocking
slide (712) (Fig. 9.8.h).
Take into account that the threaded end of the cocking slide stop pin (724) has been staked.
• Using the wrench UT 1180, unscrew the cocking slide lever stud (714) from the cocking
slide (712) (Fig. 9.8.i).
Take into account that the threaded end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) has been staked.
points :
- After having screwed and tightened the cocking slide stop pin (724) and the cocking
slide lever stud (714) into the cocking slide (712), secure them by staking their threaded
end by using the center punch UT 2030 and the hammer UT 2111.
- When fitting the cocking slide assembly (H2), from the left side, back into its slot in the
cocking slide bracket (711), orient it so that the cocking slide lever stud (714) is at the
rear side and is facing outwards.
- Ensure that the V-notch on top of the cocking slide (712) is correctly engaged by the
cocking slide plunger (721).
Maintenance manual
- 205 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 1802
726
728 735
Fig. 9.8.j - Removal of the cocking slide stud (726)
723 711
.
H1 721
.
UT 2012
722
Fig. 9.8.k - Removal of the cocking slide plunger (721) and its spring (722)
Maintenance manual
- 206 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.8.5. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide stud (726)
Requirements : • UT 1802 (Cutting pliers)

• Using the cutting pliers UT 1802, remove the wire (735) between the ‘front’ screw (728)
and the cocking slide stud (726) (Fig. 9.8.j).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, unscrew the cocking slide stud (726) from the cocking slide
bracket (711) (Fig. 9.8.j).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the cocking
slide stud (726) should correctly be secured together with the ‘front’ screw (728) by using a
wire (735) and the lock wire pliers UT 1808.
9.8.6. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking slide plunger (721) and its
spring (722)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the cocking handle assembly (H1) as described in § 9.8.1.

cocking handle assembly (H1) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the cocking handle assembly (H1) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to
avoid scratches.
of Fig. 9.8.k).
• While holding the cocking slide plunger spring (722) in position with a finger, withdraw the
drift punch UT 2012.
• Gently release and then remove the cocking slide plunger spring (722) together with the
cocking slide plunger (721) out of their housing in the cocking slide bracket (711) (right
part of Fig. 9.8.k).
points :
- The cocking slide plunger spring (722) should be fitted into the (hollow) cocking slide
plunger (721) and this assembly should then be inserted, with the tip of the plunger first,
into the housing on top of the cocking slide bracket (711).
Maintenance manual
- 207 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
633
600
a
633
610 643
641
643
614 631
612
h
b
a
660 639
668 632
666
b 667
637
i
638
642 d 634
c
23 x 635
614 h
g
636
614
647
e
i
613 620
631
f
633
c
649
646
e
644
d
633
f
648
615
g
632
Fig. 9.9.a - Back plate group [ 9 ]
Although the upper handle arm (612), the lower handle arm (613) and the rivets (614) are available as
spare parts, it is not recommended to intervene on them.
If such interventions are nevertheless required, they may only be carried out by qualified technicians using the
instructions and the tools which are only available on special request.
Maintenance manual
- 208 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.9. BACK PLATE GROUP [ 9 ] (Fig. 9.9.a)
9.9.1. Removal and reinstallation of a handle grip (632) and its tube (631)
Requirements : • OREA 554 (Wrench, back plate handle screw)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• If necessary, remove the back plate group [ 9 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
Please note that, for this operation, it is not absolutely necessary to remove the back plate group
[ 9 ].
• Using the wrench OREA 554, take out one of the 2 screws (633) which secure the handle
grip tube (631) (and therefore also the handle grip (632) itself) to the upper / lower handle
arm (612) / (613) (left part of Fig. 9.9.b).
• Release and remove the handle grip (632) and its tube (631) from between the upper and
lower handle arms (612) and (613) (right part of Fig. 9.9.b).
• Using the wrench OREA 554, separate the remaining screw (633) from the handle grip
tube (631).
points :
- Fit the handle grip (632) between the upper and lower handle arms (612) and (613) and
then, from the upper / lower side, insert the handle grip tube (631) through the
corresponding hole in the upper / lower handle.
- After their reinstallation, secure the screws (633) by staking their head into the notch ‘a’
of the upper and lower handle arms (612) and (613) by using the center punch UT 2030
and the hammer UT 2111.
633
OREA 554
a 612
632
633 .
612
631
632
613
633
.
Fig. 9.9.b - Removal of a handle grip (632) and its tube (631)
Maintenance manual
- 209 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
a
620
a )
.
610
620 b
Fig. 9.9.c - Removal of the buffer tube sleeve (620)
OREA 800
+
OREA 806
UT 2301
638
.
610 637
636
Fig. 9.9.d - Removal of the buffer disks screw (636) as well as the plunger (637) and its spring (638)
610
634
‘23’ x 635
636
.
Fig. 9.9.e - Removal of the fiber buffer disks (635) and the buffer plate (634)
Maintenance manual
- 210 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.9. BACK PLATE GROUP [ 9 ] (continued)

9.9.2. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer tube sleeve (620), the buffer plate
(634), the fiber buffer disks (635) and the buffer disks screw (636)
Requirements : • OREA 800 (Bush for OREA 801)
• OREA 806 (Tip and blade assembly, screwdriver)
• UT 2301 (Torque wrench)
• Remove the back plate group [ 9 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
Although, for reasons of clarity, the illustrations of the following procedure show the back plate
group [ 9 ] without handle grips (632), it is not necessary to remove the handle grips.
back plate group [ 9 ] can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the back plate group [ 9 ] into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
• Turn the buffer tube sleeve (620) clockwise when viewed from the rear side until its stud (a)
comes out of the groove (b) in the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly (610) and
then pull the sleeve rearwards off the buffer tube (Fig. 9.9.c).
Please note that it is not absolutely necessary to remove the buffer tube sleeve (620) in order to
enable the removal of the absorbing components provided inside the buffer tube of the back plate
subassembly (610).
• At the rear side of the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly (610) and using the torque
wrench UT 2301 (with bush OREA 800 and tip OREA 806), unscrew the buffer disks screw
(636) until the plunger (637) becomes visible (Fig. 9.9.d).
Please note that the plunger (637) is subjected to the pressure of its spring (638).
• While holding back the plunger (637) with a finger, continue unscrewing the buffer disks
screw (636) until the plunger is released and then take the plunger, together with its spring
(638), out of the screw (right part of Fig. 9.9.d).
• Completely unscrew the buffer disks screw (636) and then take the fiber buffer disks (635)
and the buffer plate (634) out of the rear side of the buffer tube of the back plate
subassembly (610) (Fig. 9.9.e).
points :
- Insert the buffer plate (634) with its narrower end first.
- When screwing the buffer disks screw (636) back into position, first screw until the
housing for the plunger (637) and its spring (638) is just not covered by the rear edge of
the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly (610). After that, fit the plunger (637) into
the open extremity of its spring (638), fit this assembly into its housing in the buffer disks
screw (636) and then, while pushing onto the plunger with the screwdriver UT 1903,
continue screwing the buffer disks screw all the way in.
- When tightening the buffer disks screw (636), apply a torque of 40.7 ± 13.5 Nm by
using the torque wrench UT 2301 (with bush OREA 800 and tip OREA 806) and then
check if the buffer disks screw protrudes by 0 - 3.3 mm from the buffer tube.
If not, correct by changing the number of fiber buffer disks (normally ‘23’).
If the buffer disks screw (636) is completely inside the buffer tube, add a fiber buffer disk. If
the buffer disks screw protrudes by more than 3.3 mm, remove a disk.
- When reinstalling the buffer tube sleeve (620), ensure that its stud (a) fits correctly into
the groove (b) in the buffer tube of the back plate subassembly (610).
Maintenance manual
- 211 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
644 UT 1803 644 647
.
615
646
613
613
615
644 646
644
647
Fig. 9.9.f - Removal of the back plate latch lock (644) and its spring (646)
a
613
613
649
UT 2003
. 642
642 648
648
Fig. 9.9.g - Removal of the back plate latch (648) and its spring (649)
Maintenance manual
- 212 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

9.9.3. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch lock (644) and its spring
(646)
[ 9 ].
Although, for reasons of clarity, the illustrations of the following procedure show the back plate
group [ 9 ] without handle grips (632), it is not necessary to remove the handle grips.
• At the lower handle arm (613) and using the pliers UT 1803, pull the locking pin (615) out
of the pin (647) (upper left part of Fig. 9.9.f).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, withdraw the pin (647) and then remove the back plate latch
lock (644) from the lower handle arm (613) (Fig. 9.9.f).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, take the back plate latch lock spring (646) out of the back plate
latch lock (644) (Fig. 9.9.f).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the 2
extremities of the back plate latch lock spring (646) should fit correctly into the corresponding
holes in the back plate latch lock (644) and that the free end of the spring should be facing
outwards (lower right part of Fig. 9.9.f).
9.9.4. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch (648) and its spring
(649)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the back plate latch lock (644) as described in § 9.9.3.
scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2003 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the (lower) pin (642)
which secures the back plate latch (648) (left part of Fig. 9.9.g).
• While holding the back plate latch (648) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift punch
UT 2003.
• Gently release and then remove the back plate latch (648) together with its spring (649)
(right part of Fig. 9.9.g).
points :
- One of the extremities of the back plate latch spring (649) should correctly engage its
housing in the back plate latch (648) while the other extremity of the spring should
correctly engage the recess (a) provided underneath the lower handle arm (613).
- The pin (642) should not protrude and its extremities should be staked by using the drift
Maintenance manual
- 213 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
668 668
UT 1913
660 666
UT 1621
610
667
666
Fig. 9.9.h - Removal and disassembly of the safety assembly (660)
Maintenance manual
- 214 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.9.5. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the safety

assembly (660)
Requirements : • UT 1110 (Open-end wrench 7 x 9 mm)

• UT 1621 (Hexagonal key 1/8”)
• LOCTITE SCREWLOCK 222
[ 9 ].
Although, for reasons of clarity, the left part of Fig. 9.9.h shows the back plate group [ 9 ] without
handle grips (632), it is not necessary to remove the handle grips.
Also for reasons of clarity, the left part of Fig. 9.9.h shows the back plate group [ 9 ] without bolt
latch release (639) and trigger (641) (which are removed in the following § 9.9.6) : it is assumed
that they are still mounted on the back plate group !
NOTE : If it has been removed, and in order to facilitate the following disassembling (and
reassembling) procedure, the back plate group [ 9 ] can be fixed into a vice.
scratches.
• Using the hexagonal key UT 1621, take out the 2 screws (668) in order to remove the
safety assembly (660) from the rear side of the back plate subassembly (610) (left part of
Fig. 9.9.h).
Take into account that the threads of the screws (668) have been secured with glue.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913, unscrew the screw (666) (together with the hexagonal nut
(667)) from the safety catch of the safety assembly (660) (Fig. 9.9.h).
• If necessary, unscrew the hexagonal nut (667) from the screw (666).
points :
- At their reinstallation, secure the screws (668) by applying glue such as ‘LOCTITE
SCREWLOCK 222’ to their threads.
- The screw (666) should be reinstalled so that it correctly holds back the trigger (641)
when the safety catch is turned inwards under the trigger.
- Once the screw (666) is installed correctly, use the wrench UT 1110 to screw the
hexagonal nut (667) against the safety catch body.
During this operation, which ensures that the screw (666) is secured into position, take care not
to turn the screw inadvertently (hold the screw in position with the screwdriver UT 1913).
Maintenance manual
- 215 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2003
642
.
641
612
639
643
610
641
642 a
639
Fig. 9.9.i - Removal of the bolt latch release (639), the trigger (641) and the springs (643)
Maintenance manual
- 216 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
9.9.6. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt latch release (639), the trigger (641)
and the springs (643)
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• If necessary, UT 1110 (Open-end wrench 7 x 9 mm)
• If necessary, UT 1913 (Screwdriver 5.5 x 150 mm)
• Remove the back plate group [ 9 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Turn the safety catch of the safety assembly (660) outwards.
scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2003 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the (upper) pin (642)
which secures the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) (upper part of Fig. 9.9.i).
• While holding the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) in position with a finger,
withdraw the drift punch UT 2003.
• Gently release and then remove the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) together
with the springs (643) (Fig. 9.9.i).
points :
- One of the extremities of the springs (643) should correctly engage its housing in the bolt
latch release (639) / the trigger (641) while the other extremity of the springs should
correctly engage the corresponding recess provided in the back plate subassembly (610)
(lower right part of Fig. 9.9.i).
- Reinstall first the bolt latch release (639) and then the trigger (641).
Fit the bolt latch release (639) into the upper opening (a) in the back plate subassembly (610)
so that its left side is against the left side of the opening.
Fit the trigger (641) in position between the bolt latch release (639) and the right side of the
opening (a).
- Ensure that the handle of the bolt latch release (639) is correctly positioned between the
2 forks of the trigger (641).
holes in the bolt latch release (639) and the trigger (641) with the corresponding holes in
the back plate subassembly (610).
- The pin (642) should not protrude and its extremities should be staked by using the drift
- After the reinstallation, check and, if necessary, adjust the safety assembly (660) as
described at the end of § 9.9.5.
Maintenance manual
- 217 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
2.75 cm 2 cm -2 cm -9 cm
Line of sights
Target
at 150 m 100 m 50 m
MI.50
200 m
M2HB QCB
Fig. 10.1.a - Trajectory of a bullet for a correct firing precision at a distance of 200 m (*)
MPI
x
x
x x P
x x
x
x x
x
Target
at 200 m
MPI
MPI
x P1 P1
x x x
x x x x
x x xx x
x
2.75 cm x x 2 cm x x x
x
-2 cm xxxxx x
x x xx
MPI
P P P
Target Target
P1 Target
at 150 m at 100 m at 50 m
Fig. 10.1.b - Shooting at a target to check the firing precision (*)
Maintenance manual
- 218 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 10 : INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS
Before any inspection or adjustment, ensure that the machine gun is perfectly clean.
10.1. CHECKING THE FIRING PRECISION (*) (Fig. 10.1.a and Fig. 10.1.b)
NOTE : In order to increase the accuracy of the following checking procedure, it is
recommended to use the machine gun on a tripod or to fix it in a fixing support such
as a shooting adjustment device, ...
In any case, eliminate the less accurate impact.
The firing precision should periodically be checked by proceeding as follows :
• Turn the safety catch outwards so that the trigger (641) is no longer blocked into position
and ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
• Set the machine gun for a shooting range of ‘200 m’.

As a rule, the firing precision of the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun should be checked on a
target located at 200 m.
This checking procedure (and the following adjustment procedure) can also be carried out on a
target located at less than 200 m as long as the necessary corrections are made to compensate
for the trajectory of the bullet (Fig. 10.1.a).
This checking procedure (and the following adjustment procedure) will therefore explain the
corrections to be made for targets located at 50 m, 100 m and 150 m.
• Aim the machine gun at a well-determined point (P) on a safe target.

Always aim at the point (P), independently of the distance of the target (Fig. 10.1.a and
Fig. 10.1.b).
• Fire 10 single shots and eliminate the less accurate impact.
• At the target, check if the 10-1 impacts are situated within a square with a side of 120 cm.
In case of a target located at 50 / 100 / 150 m, the impacts should be situated within a square
with a side of 30 / 60 / 90 cm.
If so, directly proceed to the next step.

If not, repeat the shooting procedure at least twice.
If, during these next tries, the 10-1 impacts are still not situated within a square with the
appropriate side, this indicates that the barrel (110) / (110/1) of the machine gun is showing
signs of wear : replace the barrel and then restart this checking procedure.
• At the target, determine the mean point of impact (MPI).
• If the MPI corresponds to the point of aim (P) (target at 200 m) or to an imaginary point
(P1) (2 cm under / 2 cm above / 2.75 cm above the point of aim (P) (target at 50 / 100 /
150 m)), the firing precision is correct.
If not, the firing precision should be adjusted as described in the following § 10.2.
Maintenance manual
- 219 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
OREA 255 3826
3824 3854
Fig. 10.2.a - Turning the front sight (3824) in order to
correct the vertical position of the MPI (*)
UT 1903
510
m
548
547
541 548
Fig. 10.2.b - Turning the rear sight windage knob Fig. 10.2.c - Correcting the position of the rear
(541) in order to correct the lateral position of the sight windage scale (547) (*)
MPI (*)
Maintenance manual
- 220 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.2. ADJUSTMENT OF THE SIGHTS (*)

Requirements : • OREA 255 (Wrench, front sight)
The front sight (3824) and the rear sight assembly (500) should be adjusted after each
intervention (removal, disassembling, ...) on the sights of the machine gun.
They should also be adjusted if required by the checking procedure of the previous § 10.1.
Proceed as follows :
• Check the firing precision of the machine gun as described in § 10.1.

If the MPI corresponds to the point of aim (P) (for targets located at 200 m) or to the imaginary
point (P1) (for targets located at 50 / 100 / 150 m), the following adjustment procedure should
not be carried out.
If not, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
• If a vertical correction of the MPI is required, proceed as follows :

Using the OREA 255 through the upper hole in the front sight cover (3826), turn the
front sight (3824) in order to correct the vertical position of the MPI (Fig. 10.2.a).
In order to raise the MPI, turn the front sight in the clockwise direction (downwards).
In order to lower the MPI, turn the front sight in the counterclockwise direction (upwards).
Take into account that each 90° turn of the front sight will change the vertical position of the
MPI by 10 / 7.5 / 5 / 2.5 cm on a target located at 200 / 150 / 100 / 50 m.
• If a lateral correction of the MPI is required, proceed as follows :

- Turn the rear sight windage knob (541) in order to correct the lateral position of the MPI
(Fig. 10.2.b).
In order to move the MPI towards the right (left) side, turn the rear sight windage knob (541) in
the (counter)clockwise direction when viewed from the left side.
Take into account that each 90° turn of the rear sight windage knob (541) will generate a click
and that each click corresponds to a change of the lateral position of the MPI by 2.5 mils.
- After this lateral correction of the MPI, it is most probable that the ‘0’ line on the rear
sight windage scale (547) is not correctly aligned with the mark ‘m’ on the rear sight leaf
assembly (520) (Fig. 10.2.c).
In such a case, correct the position of the rear sight windage scale (547) by proceeding
as follows (Fig. 10.2.c) :
- Using the screwdriver UT 1903, slightly loosen the 2 screws (548) which secure the
rear sight windage scale (547) to the rear sight base (510).
- Correct the position of the rear sight windage scale (547) and then tighten the 2
screws (548).
• Check if the firing precision of the machine gun is now correct.

If so, the adjustment is terminated.
If not, repeat the adjustment procedure until a correct firing precision is obtained.
Maintenance manual
- 221 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 222 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.3. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE BARREL (110) / (110/1)
Preparation
• Thoroughly clean and dry the barrel (110) / (110/1) (refer to chapter 8).
• Carry out a visual inspection of the outside of the barrel (110) / (110/1).
• Carry out a visual inspection of the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1).
Checking the barrel (110) / (110/1) for keyholing (resulting in elongated

impacts on a target)
This checking procedure should only be carried out after the barrel (110) / (110/1) has been
used intensively and/or in case of doubt about its condition.
• Correctly mount the barrel group [ 1 ] and load the machine gun.
• Turn the safety catch outwards so that the trigger (641) is no longer blocked into position
and ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
• Aim the machine gun at a safe target located at 25 m and fire 10 single shots.
• At the target, check if the impacts are not too elongated (‘keyholed’ of 15° or more).
An impact is keyholed of 15° when its length reaches 22 mm.
If 20% or more of the impacts are keyholed of 15° or more, the bore of the barrel (110) /
(110/1) shows serious signs of wear : the barrel should be rejected !
Otherwise, the barrel is OK.
• Repeat the ‘preparation’ procedure described above and then check the barrel (110) /
(110/1) for coppering as described in the following paragraph.
Maintenance manual
- 223 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 224 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
Checking the barrel (110) / (110/1) for coppering
This checking procedure should be carried out to check the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) for
excessive copper deposit.
Requirements : • G093 (Copper gauge for STL and CHR .50 barrels)
• Distilled water H2O
• Ammonium persulphate
• Ammonium carbonate
• Ammonia
• Rubber plug for sealing the barrel at the side of the chamber
• Insert the copper gauge G093 into the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and ensure
that it is able to enter the bore of the barrel at least until the reference line.
• If so, the bore is not subjected to excessive coppering.
If not, the copper fouling inside the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) should be removed
by carrying out the following chemical procedure :
- Prepare the following solution : Distilled water H2O : 336 cm3

Ammonium persulphate : 84 g
Ammonium carbonate : 42 g
Ammonia : 528 cm3
- Ensure that the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) is perfectly clean and dry.
- At the side of the chamber, seal the barrel (110) / (110/1) by using a rubber plug.
- Fix the barrel (110) / (110/1) vertically into a vice, with its muzzle pointing upwards.
When fixing the barrel (110) / (110/1) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
- Completely fill the barrel (110) / (110/1) with the solution prepared above.
- Wait 20-30 minutes, remove the barrel (110) / (110/1) from the vice and then pour the
solution from the barrel into a flask or a clear glass : the solution will be tinted blue due
to the presence of copper salt.
- Repeat the 3 previous steps until the solution coming out of the barrel (110) / (110/1) is
no longer tinted blue but keeps its original colour.
When the solution keeps its original colour, the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) is considered
being free from copper deposits.
- Remove the sealing and then thoroughly clean and dry the barrel (110) / (110/1) in
order to remove any trace of the solution (refer to chapter 8).
• Gauge the bore of the barrel (110) / (110/1) as described in the following paragraphs.
NOTE : After having removed the coppering, it is absolutely necessary to gauge the bore
of the barrel (110) / (110/1).
Maintenance manual
- 225 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Fig. 10.3.a - Bullet lead inspection gauge (1650)
c
1650
110
Fig. 10.3.b - Gauging the bore of the chrome-plated barrel (110)
Maintenance manual
- 226 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
Gauging the bore of the chrome-plated barrel (110)
Requirements : • 1650 (Bullet lead inspection)
The following gauging procedure only applies to the bore of the chrome-plated barrel (110).
The procedure requires the bullet lead inspection gauge (1650) which consists of a gauge rod (a)
fitted into a gauge head (b) (Fig. 10.3.a).
Never gauge a heated barrel (110) : it would result in incorrect gauging results and it can cause
damage to the bullet lead inspection gauge (1650).
Proceed as follows (Fig. 10.3.b) :
• From the side of the chamber, insert the bullet lead inspection gauge (1650), with the
conical end of its gauge rod (a) first, into the bore of the barrel (110).
• Position the gauge head (b) of the bullet lead inspection gauge (1650) so that its wider flat
face (c) comes perfectly into contact with the rear end of the barrel (110).
• Without applying excessive force, push the gauge rod (a) as far as possible into the barrel
(110).
• Check if the ‘80 mm’ graduation on the gauge rod (a) is still visible.
Note that the ‘80 mm’ graduation corresponds to the second small red-painted groove on the
gauge rod (a).
• If the ‘80 mm’ graduation is still visible, the condition of the barrel (110) is correct.
If the ‘80 mm’ graduation has disappeared under the rear edge of the gauge head (b), the
barrel (110) is worn and should be rejected.
Please note that, if the ‘50 mm’ graduation has disappeared under the rear edge of the gauge
head (b), the barrel (110) shows signs of wear and is therefore in a ‘warning’ condition.
Maintenance manual
- 227 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
a b 1690
Fig. 10.3.c - Barrel gauges box (1695)
A
1690
c b a
Fig. 10.3.d - Checking the barrel erosion gauge (A)
110/1
d a
a
b b
d
110/1
Gauging the (rear) stellited portion of Gauging the (front) chrome-plated
the barrel (110/1) portion of the barrel (110/1)
Fig. 10.3.e - Gauging the bore of the stellited barrel (110/1)
Maintenance manual
- 228 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
Gauging the bore of the stellited barrel (110/1)
Requirements : • 1695 (Box, barrel gauges)
The following gauging procedure only applies to the bore of the stellited barrel (110/1).
The procedure requires the barrel gauges box (1695) which contains the barrel erosion gauge (A)
and the calibrating gauge (1690) (Fig. 10.3.c).
The barrel erosion gauge (A) consists of a gauge rod (a) fitted into a gauge tube (b).
(a) Checking the barrel erosion gauge (A)
Before using the barrel erosion gauge (A), check it by proceeding as follows :
- While holding the expanding part (c) of the barrel erosion gauge (A) into the hole of
the calibrating gauge (1690), push the gauge rod (a) into the gauge tube (b) until the
expanding part is expanded so that it comes fully into contact with the inner side of the
hole of the calibrating gauge and that it exerts a light pressure on it (Fig. 10.3.d).
- Check if the ‘reject’-mark on the gauge rod (a) is at the rear end of the gauge tube (b).
If not, the barrel erosion gauge (A) is not OK.
(b) Gauging (Fig. 10.3.e)
Never gauge a heated barrel (110/1) : it would result in incorrect gauging results and it can
cause damage to the barrel erosion gauge (A).
- Set the gauge tube (b) for checking the (rear) stellited portion of the barrel (110/1) by
positioning the stop (d) of the tube onto the front ‘H.B.’-mark (left part of Fig. 10.3.e).
- From the side of the chamber, insert the gauge tube (b), with its expanding part (c) (also
refer to Fig. 10.3.d) first, into the bore of the barrel (110/1) until the stop (d) touches
the rear end of the barrel (left part of Fig. 10.3.e).
- Without applying excessive force, push the gauge rod (a) as far as possible into the
gauge tube (b).
- The condition of the stellited portion of the barrel (110/1) is now determined by the
visibility of the ‘reject’-mark and the mark just in front of it.
If both marks are visible, the condition of the stellited portion of the barrel (110/1) is correct.
If only the ‘reject’-mark is visible, the stellited portion of the barrel (110/1) shows signs of
wear so that the barrel should be replaced as soon as possible.
If both marks have disappeared under the rear edge of the gauge tube (b), the stellited
portion of the barrel (110/1) is worn and the barrel should be rejected.
- Repeat the above procedure for the (front) chrome-plated portion of the barrel (110/1)
after having positioned the stop (d) of the gauge tube (b) onto the rear ‘H.B.’-mark
(right part of Fig. 10.3.e).
Maintenance manual
- 229 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1610
G097
1700
Fig. 10.4.a - Headspace adjustment device (1700) and headspace gauges

(1610) and G097
Maintenance manual
- 230 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.4. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE HEADSPACE
With a cartridge present in the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1), the headspace is the
distance between the bottom of the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820)
and a particular point on the front part of the cartridge case.
This distance is very important as it determines if the weapon functions correctly and in all safety.
A too large headspace can result in :

- Insufficient support of the cartridge at the instant of firing.
- Injury to the shooter.

- Damage to the locking surfaces of the bolt (820) and the breech lock (221) as they are not
perfectly into contact with each other at the instant of firing.
A too small headspace, which can only result from a bad adjustment at the GM level (see further),
can cause :
- A failure to lock the moving parts.
As the headspace cannot be checked directly, it will be checked indirectly by using the
headspace adjustment device (1700) in combination with an appropriate headspace gauge
(Fig. 10.4.a).
As explained in the following subparagraphs, the used headspace gauge depends on the
maintenance level :
FM/AM level (§ 10.4.1) : Headspace gauge (1610)

GM level (§ 10.4.2) : Headspace gauge G097
Besides the periodic inspections, the headspace should also be checked and gauged after each
intervention (removal, replacement, disassembling, ...) on the moving parts.
It is especially important to check and gauge the headspace when replacing the breech lock
(221) (also refer to § 9.3.2).
After having checked and adjusted the headspace, it is absolutely necessary to carry out
the adjustment of the timing described in § 10.5.
If, during the adjustment of the headspace, the breech lock (221) is replaced by another one with a different
number, it will be necessary to change the last two digits of the number combination marked on the upper front
part of the bolt (820).
If the barrel extension assembly (200) is replaced by another (new) one, it will be necessary to mark the barrel
extension body (C1) or to change the existing mark.
If the bolt assembly (810) is replaced by another (new) one, it will be necessary to mark the bolt (820) or to
change the existing mark.
For more information about the marking of the barrel extension body (C1) and the bolt (820), refer respectively to
§ 9.3.3. and § 9.5.9.
Maintenance manual
- 231 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1700
.
110
110/1
820
Fig. 10.4.b - Inserting the headspace adjustment device (1700) into the chamber of the barrel (110) /
(110/1)
1610
820
Fig. 10.4.c - Using the headspace gauge (1610)
Maintenance manual
- 232 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.4. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE HEADSPACE (continued)
10.4.1. Checking and gauging the headspace at the FM/AM level

The checking and gauging procedure for the headspace at the FM (Field Maintenance) / AM
(Advanced Maintenance) level allows checking and, if necessary, correcting the headspace by just
changing the breech lock (221), without further interventions on the machine gun.
If the following procedure does not allow an appropriate correction, the headspace should be
checked and gauged at the (higher) GM (General Maintenance) level (refer to § 10.4.2).
Requirements : • 1610 (Headspace gauge .50 QCB)

• 1700 (Device for adjustment headspace)
(a) Checking procedure

• Ensure that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out so that the trigger (641) is
blocked into position and the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
• Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and hold it in that position.
• Insert the headspace adjustment device (1700), with its rear groove oriented vertically,
into the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) (Fig. 10.4.b).
Do not release the cocking handle (730) in order to avoid any risk of trapping the fingers by
an unexpected return of the bolt (820) !
• Push the cocking handle (730) back forwards.

• Pointing the machine gun in a safe direction, push down on the bolt latch release (639)
in order to release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position.
If, for any reason, the bolt (820) does not reach its most forward position and taking care not
to trap the fingers, pull it forwards by inserting a screwdriver or a similar tool into its upper
groove and using the upper plate of the receiver (3100) as a support.
• Ensure that the rear end of the headspace adjustment device (1700) touches the
bottom of the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820) (lower right
part of Fig. 10.4.b).
If not, try to obtain correct contact by again pulling the cocking handle (730) completely
rearwards, pushing it back forwards and then letting the bolt (820) return towards its front
position by repeating the previous step. If there is still not correct contact, check if the
problem is not caused by dirt. If the problem cannot be solved by cleaning, the gun should
be examined by a qualified armourer.
• Check if the .200 (GO) and the .212 (NO GO) ends of the headspace gauge (1610)
enter into the space between the bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace
adjustment device (1700) and the front face of the bolt (820) (Fig. 10.4.c).
Do not apply excessive force.
• Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and hold it in that position.
• Take the headspace adjustment device (1700) out of the chamber of the barrel (110) /
(110/1).
• Push the cocking handle (730) back forwards.
Maintenance manual
- 233 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 234 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.4.1. Checking and gauging the headspace at the FM/AM level (continued)
(a) Checking procedure (continued)
• Pointing the machine gun in a safe direction, push down on the bolt latch release (639)
in order to release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position and
then push down on the trigger (641) to release the firing pin (861).
(b) After the checking procedure
The headspace is correct when the 2 following conditions are fulfilled :
- The .200 (GO) end of the headspace gauge (1610) enters into the space between the
bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace adjustment device (1700) and the
front face of the bolt (820).
If the .200 (GO) end cannot enter, the machine gun has been adjusted incorrectly : the
machine gun should be sent for an intervention at the (higher) GM (General Maintenance)
level (refer to § 10.4.2).
- The .212 (NO GO) end of the headspace gauge (1610) does not enter into the space
between the bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace adjustment device
(1700) and the front face of the bolt (820).
If the .212 (NO GO) end can enter, replace the presently installed breech lock (221) by a
spare breech lock with a 4 units higher (marked) number (also refer to § 9.3.2) and then
repeat the checking and gauging procedure.
The highest available breech lock number is ‘28’ : if the breech lock (221) which should be
replaced has a number of ‘25’ or higher, the machine gun should be sent for an intervention
at the (higher) GM (General Maintenance) level (refer to § 10.4.2).
If the breech lock (221) has been replaced by another one with a different number, it will be necessary to change
the last two digits of the number combination marked on the upper front part of the bolt (820).
For more information about the marking of the bolt (820), refer to § 9.5.9.
Maintenance manual
- 235 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
If, during the adjustment of the headspace, the breech lock (221) is replaced by another one with a different
number, it will be necessary to change the last two digits of the number combination marked on the upper front
part of the bolt (820).
If the barrel extension assembly (200) is replaced by another (new) one, it will be necessary to mark the barrel
extension body (C1) or to change the existing mark.
If the bolt assembly (810) is replaced by another (new) one, it will be necessary to mark the bolt (820) or to
change the existing mark.
For more information about the marking of the barrel extension body (C1) and the bolt (820), refer respectively to
§ 9.3.3. and § 9.5.9.
Maintenance manual
- 236 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.4.2. Checking and gauging the headspace at the GM level

The checking and gauging procedure for the headspace at the GM (General Maintenance) level
allows checking and, if necessary, correcting the headspace by changing the breech lock (221) or by
carrying out other interventions on the machine gun.
In order to enable a future adjustment at the FM/AM level, the following procedure is more rigorous
than the one described in § 10.4.1 : at the GM level, it is not allowed to correct the headspace by
installing a breech lock (221) with a number of ‘25’ or higher.
Requirements : • 1700 (Device for adjustment headspace)

• G097 (Headspace selection gauge)
• Insert the headspace adjustment device (1700), with its rear groove oriented vertically,
into the chamber of the barrel (110) / (110/1) and check if it has been inserted
correctly as described in § 10.4.1.a.
• Check if the .202 (GO) and the .204 (NO GO) ends of the headspace gauge G097
enter into the space between the bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace
adjustment device (1700) and the front face of the bolt (820) (also refer to Fig. 10.4.c).
Do not apply excessive force.
• Remove the headspace adjustment device (1700) from the chamber of the barrel
(110) / (110/1) and close the feed cover (D1) as described in § 10.4.1.a.
(b) After the checking procedure
The headspace is correct when the 2 following conditions are fulfilled :
- The .202 (GO) end of the headspace gauge G097 enters into the space between the
bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace adjustment device (1700) and the
front face of the bolt (820).
If the .202 (GO) end cannot enter, replace the presently installed breech lock (221) by a
spare breech lock with a 1 unit lower (marked) number and then repeat the checking and
gauging procedure.
- The .204 (NO GO) end of the headspace gauge G097 does not enter into the space
between the bottom of the rear (vertical) groove of the headspace adjustment device
(1700) and the front face of the bolt (820).
If the .204 (NO GO) end can enter, replace the presently installed breech lock (221) by a
spare breech lock with a 1 unit higher (marked) number and then repeat the checking and
gauging procedure.
Although the highest available breech lock number is ‘28’ and in order to enable a future
adjustment at the FM/AM level, it is not allowed to correct the headspace at the GM level by
installing a breech lock (221) with a number of ‘25’ or higher.
If a breech lock (221) with a marked number less than ‘13’ or exceeding ‘24’ is required
to correct the headspace, there is a major problem with the machine gun.
In such a case, first replace the barrel extension assembly (200) and then check if the headspace
can be gauged and corrected as described above. If the problem is not solved, check if it can be
solved by replacing the bolt assembly (810). If the problem is still not solved, the complete
moving parts should be replaced.
Maintenance manual
- 237 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Fig. 10.5.a - Timing gauge (1645)
1645
B1
200
Fig. 10.5.b - Using the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate of

the timing gauge (1645)
Maintenance manual
- 238 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT

The timing adjustment ensures that the cartridge is not fired too early or too late.
In case of too early firing, the machine gun would operate incorrectly (problems with the extraction of
the cartridges from the ammunition belt, short recoil of the moving parts, ...).
Too late firing could cause serious damage to the front part of the receiver (3100), the barrel
extension group [ 3 ] and the front face of the bolt (820).
The timing will be checked by using the timing gauge (1645) which consists of the 3 following
gauge plates (Fig. 10.5.a) :
- a ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (2.95 mm / .116”)
- a ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (1.50 mm / .059”)
- a ‘REJECT’ gauge plate (0.51 mm / .020”)
Besides the periodic inspections, the timing should also be checked after having checked and
gauged the headspace and after each intervention (removal, replacement, disassembling, ...)
on the moving parts, the trigger bar (3846) and the breech lock cam (3816).
As the timing is adjusted by means of the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651), it is especially
important to check the timing after any intervention on this nut (also refer to § 9.2.13).
10.5.1. Checking the timing

The following checking procedure allows checking at the FM (Field Maintenance) / AM (Advanced
Maintenance) level if the timing lays between the limits of a safe use of the machine gun.
Requirements : • 1645 (Fixed timing gauge)
• Ensure that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out.

• Pull the cocking handle (730) completely rearwards and push it back forwards.
Please note that, after this operation, the bolt (820) is held back at its rear position and the firing
pin (861) is cocked.
• Pointing the machine gun in a safe direction, push down on the bolt latch release (639) in
order to release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position.
• Pull the cocking handle (730) rearwards, just enough to move the moving parts rearwards
by approx. 5 mm, and hold it in that position.
• Insert the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645) between the front face of
the barrel extension assembly (200) and the inner part of the receiver frame (B1)
(Fig. 10.5.b).
• Release the cocking handle (730) so that the moving parts move back forwards and come
into contact with the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645).
• Unblock the trigger (641) and push down on it : the firing pin (861) must not
operate.
Maintenance manual
- 239 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1645 1645
B1
B1
200
200
Fig. 10.5.c - Using the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the Fig. 10.5.d - Using the ‘REJECT’ gauge plate of
timing gauge (1645) the timing gauge (1645)
B1
OREA 797
3653
3651
B5
Fig. 10.5.e - Temporarily fixing the trigger bar

stop assembly (B5) by using the OREA 797
Maintenance manual
- 240 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT (continued)
10.5.1. Checking the timing (continued)
• Replace the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645) by the ‘FIRE’ gauge
plate (Fig. 10.5.c).
into contact with the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645).
• Push down on the trigger (641) : the firing pin (861) must operate.
• Remove the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645), close the feed cover (D1)
(ensure that it locks correctly into position) and then block the trigger (641).
• If both above conditions are fulfilled, the timing is correct.
If one or both of the above conditions are not fulfilled, the timing should be adjusted at the
GM (General Maintenance) level as described in § 10.5.2 and then checked again as
described above.
NOTE : The firing pin (861) must always operate with the ‘REJECT’ gauge plate of the
timing gauge (1645) (Fig. 10.5.d).
If the firing pin (861) does not operate with the ‘REJECT’ gauge plate of the timing gauge
(1645), the gun should be restricted for further use and examined by a qualified armourer.
10.5.2. Adjustment of the timing

The following adjusting procedure, which is intended for the GM (General Maintenance) level,
allows a precise adjustment of the timing if required by the checking procedure of § 10.5.1, after
each intervention on the headspace or after replacement of the moving parts, the trigger bar
(3846), the breech lock cam (3816) and especially the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651).
Requirements : • 1645 (Fixed timing gauge)

• OREA 797 (Adjusting screw)
• If not already used, requirements of § 9.2.13
• Ensure that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out.
• If not already done, remove the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) as described in § 9.2.13.
• Temporarily reinstall the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) on the inner upper rear part of the
receiver frame (B1) by using the OREA 797 instead of the (longer) screw (3654)
(Fig. 10.5.e).
Ensure that the upper face of the trigger bar stop bracket (3653) comes perfectly into contact with
the receiver frame (B1).
• Screw or unscrew the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) until its lower face is flush with the
lower end of the threaded pin of the trigger bar stop bracket (3653).
• Unscrew the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) by 1 turn (approx. 1 mm) in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from underneath.
Maintenance manual
- 241 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1645
B1
200
Fig. 10.5.f - Using the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the

timing gauge (1645)
B1
3654
B5
3651
Fig. 10.5.g - Final installation of the trigger bar

stop assembly (B5)
Maintenance manual
- 242 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT (continued)
10.5.2. Adjustment of the timing (continued)

• While ensuring that the upper face of the trigger bar stop bracket (3653) is and remains
perfectly into contact with the receiver frame (B1), reinstall the back plate assembly (600) as
described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
Please note that, after this operation, the bolt (820) is held back at its rear position and the firing
pin (861) is cocked.
• Pointing the machine gun in a safe direction, push down on the bolt latch release (639) in
order to release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position.
• Insert the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645) between the front face of the
barrel extension assembly (200) and the inner part of the receiver frame (B1) (Fig. 10.5.f).
into contact with the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge (1645).
• Unblock the trigger (641) and push down on it : check if the firing pin (861) operates.
If the firing pin (861) does not operate, repeat the above procedure by each time screwing the
trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) by two notches in the clockwise direction when viewed from
underneath until the firing pin operates and then unscrew the nut by two notches in the
counterclockwise direction.
If the firing pin (861) operates, repeat the above procedure by each time unscrewing the trigger
bar stop knurled nut (3651) by two notches in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from
underneath until the firing pin does not operate anymore.
Between two checks, always remove and then reinsert the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate of the timing gauge
(1645).
• After having carried out the instructions of the previous step, repeat the above procedure by
each time screwing the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) by one notch in the clockwise
direction when viewed from underneath until the firing pin operates.
• Without turning the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651), remove the trigger bar stop
assembly (B5) from the inner upper rear part of the receiver frame (B1) by taking out the
OREA 797 (also refer to Fig. 10.5.e).
• Reinstall the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) on the inner upper rear part of the receiver
frame (B1) by using the (longer) screw (3654) (Fig. 10.5.g).
During this operation, the trigger bar stop knurled nut (3651) should not be turned more than to
allow its blocage by the engagement of the (long) screw (3654) into one of its notches !
• Reinstall the back plate assembly (600) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
• Check the timing as described in § 10.5.1.
Maintenance manual
- 243 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
NO GO G028
1671 MAX
GO MIN
820
820
a 861
Fig. 10.6.a - Inspection of the T-slot (a) for the Fig. 10.6.b - Inspection of the firing pin protrusion
cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820)
820
1673
Fig. 10.6.c - Inspection of the firing pin hole (b) in

the front face of the bolt (820)
Maintenance manual
- 244 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
10.6. CHECKING THE BOLT GROUP [ 5 ]
Before carrying out the following inspections, remove the bolt assembly (810) as described for
‘field stripping’ in § 7.1 and then clean it thoroughly.
Inspection of the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820)
(Fig. 10.6.a)
Requirements : • 1671 (Gauge, checking, length, cartridge slot)
The T-slot (a) for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (820) should periodically be
checked by using the T-slot checking gauge (1671).
Ensure that the GO end of the gauge can pass freely through the T-slot while the NO GO end
(be very careful !) cannot pass through it.
If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the bolt (820) should be replaced.
Inspection of the firing pin protrusion (Fig. 10.6.b)
Requirements : • G028 (Firing pin protrusion)

The firing pin protrusion should periodically be checked by using the firing pin protrusion
gauge G028.
• Cock the firing pin (861) by pushing the cocking lever (865) forwards.
• Pull the cocking lever (865) completely rearwards and then, with the tip of a screwdriver or
a similar tool, push down on the sear (863) in order to release the firing pin (861).
• At the front face of the bolt (820), ensure that the MAX notch of the firing pin protrusion
gauge G028 can be placed over the protruding end of the firing pin (861).
If this condition is not fulfilled, the firing pin (861) should be replaced.
Inspection of the firing pin hole in the front face of the bolt (820)
(Fig. 10.6.c)
Requirements : • 1673 (Gauge, checking, firing pin hole)
The firing pin hole (b) in the front face of the bolt (820) should periodically be checked by
using the firing pin hole checking gauge (1673).
• Cock the firing pin (861) by pushing the cocking lever (865) forwards.
• Ensure that it is not possible to insert the gauge into the firing pin hole.
If it is possible to insert the gauge, the bolt (820) should be replaced.
After the inspections, reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2.
Maintenance manual
- 245 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 11 : TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1. THE GUN DOES NOT FIRE CORRECTLY WHEN THE TRIGGER (641) IS
PUSHED DOWN
The following procedures will normally solve almost all the problems which are not caused by
the breakage of parts.
First try if the problem can be solved by procedure 1. If the problem is not solved, try
procedure 2.
If the 2 procedures do not solve the problem, check if none of the typical problems given in
§ 11.2 has occurred.
If the problem is still not solved, the gun should be restricted for further use and examined
by a qualified armourer.
Procedure 1
- If the machine gun has been set for automatic firing, the bolt (820) will not be held back
at its rear position : it will return towards its front position.
- If the machine gun has been set for single-shot firing, the bolt (820) will be held back at
its rear position : push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt
so that the latter returns towards its front position.
Ensure that, in either firing mode, this step causes the cartridge which should have been
fired, to be ejected out of the machine gun.
If the cartridge is not ejected, immediately proceed to procedure 2.
• Pointing it in a safe direction, try if the machine gun now fires correctly when the trigger
(641) is pushed down.
If not, try if the problem can be solved by carrying out procedure 2.
Maintenance manual
- 246 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
11.1. THE GUN DOES NOT FIRE CORRECTLY WHEN THE TRIGGER (641) IS
PUSHED DOWN (continued)
Procedure 2
• Turn the safety catch inwards under the trigger (641) so that the latter is blocked into
position.
• Ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
If the bolt latch release (639) is locked in its lower position by the lock of the buffer tube sleeve
(620), unlock it by turning the sleeve clockwise when viewed from the rear side.
• Open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440) and then release and remove the
ammunition belt.
To release the ammunition belt, it will be necessary to raise the extractor/ejector assembly (840) :
do not forget to lower the assembly after having removed the ammunition belt.
If present, remove any link from the feed tray of the receiver (3100).
• Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820) so that the
• Pull the cocking handle (730) again completely rearwards and push it back forwards.
Please note that, after this operation, the bolt (820) is again held back at its rear position.
• Ensure that the front face of the bolt (820) is free from ammunition.
If there is a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (820), try to remove it by pushing downwards on
the rim of its case with a tool such as a screwdriver or pliers.
During this operation, NEVER touch the primer of the cartridge with the tool (in order to avoid
any risk of explosion) and ensure that the barrel is ALWAYS pointing in a safe direction !
• Ensure that the inside of the machine gun is not excessively soiled (sand, mud, ...).
release the bolt (820) so that the latter returns towards its front position.
• Reload the machine gun.
• Pointing it in a safe direction, try if the machine gun now fires correctly when the trigger
(641) is pushed down.
Maintenance manual
- 247 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
11.2. TYPICAL PROBLEMS
Problem Cause Solution
Problem with the ammunition ---> • Incorrectly positioned ---> Correct the position of the
belt ammunition belt ammunition belt
• Incorrectly assembled ---> Use a correctly assembled

ammunition belt ammunition belt
• Damaged cartridge(s) and/ ---> Remove the corresponding

or link(s) cartridge(s) and link(s) from the
ammunition belt
Problem when extracting the ---> Broken, worn or deformed ---> Replace the extractor/ejector
cartridge from the ammunition extractor/ejector assembly assembly (840)
belt (840)
The cartridge does not enter ---> • Soiling, oxidation or ---> Clean the chamber
the chamber scratches in the chamber
If necessary, replace the barrel
(110) / (110/1)
• Damaged (previous) ---> Remove the cartridge

cartridge
If necessary, use the ruptured
case extractor (1073) as
described in § 11.3
Failure to lock ---> Too small headspace ---> Check and gauge the
headspace as described in
§ 10.4
Failure to fire ---> • Wrong timing ---> Adjust the timing as described
in § 10.5
• Defective cartridge ---> Remove the cartridge
• Broken, worn or deformed ---> Replace the firing pin (861)

firing pin (861)
• Incorrect operation of the ---> Check the operation of the

firing pin (861) firing pin (861)
Short recoil ---> Defective or damaged ---> Remove the cartridge

cartridge
Maintenance manual
- 248 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
11.2. TYPICAL PROBLEMS (continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Failure to extract the cartridge ---> • Soiling, oxidation or ---> Clean the chamber
from the chamber scratches in the chamber
If necessary, replace the barrel
(110) / (110/1)
• Damaged cartridge ---> Remove the cartridge

• Too large headspace ---> Check and gauge the

headspace as described in
§ 10.4
Failure to eject the cartridge ---> • Defective cartridge ---> Unload and reload the
machine gun
• Defective ejector (842) ---> Replace the ejector (842)
11.3. REMOVAL OF A RUPTURED CARTRIDGE CASE
Too large headspace, defective ammunition, excessive soiling or wear of the chamber, ... can cause
the rupture of a cartridge case, often resulting in an explosion of the cartridge at the instant of firing.
Requirements : • 1073 (Ruptured case extractor)
If a ruptured cartridge case cannot be removed from the chamber as described in § 6.4 or
§ 11.1, use the ruptured case extractor (1073) by proceeding as follows :
• While holding the moving parts rearwards by using the cocking handle (730), fit the
ruptured case extractor (1073) with its rear end into the T-slot for the cartridges on the front
face of the bolt (820).
• Push down on the bolt latch release (639) in order to release the bolt (820).
• Move the cocking handle (730) back forwards so that the bolt (820) pushes the ruptured
case extractor (1073) into the chamber.
During this operation, ensure that the ruptured case extractor (1073) is and remains correctly
aligned with the chamber.
• While pulling the cocking handle (730) again rearwards, ensure that the remaining parts of
the cartridge are extracted from the chamber.
If it is still impossible to remove the (ruptured) cartridge case, the barrel group [ 1 ] should be
restricted for further use (replace it by another one) and examined by a qualified armourer.
Maintenance manual
- 249 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
831
820
b
823
c
831
Fig. 12.1.a - Changing the orientation of the bolt switch (831)
831
820
840
Fig. 12.1.b - Reinstallation of the extractor/ejector assembly (840)
Maintenance manual
- 250 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 12 : SPECIAL INTERVENTIONS
12.1. CHANGING THE MACHINE GUN FROM LEFT-HAND TO RIGHT-

HAND FEEDING
NOTE : Changing the MI.50 M2HB QCB machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding
requires 2 new components : the link stripper (3829) and the rear cartridge stop
(3830).
A link stripper (3829) and a rear cartridge stop (3830) are supplied, together with a
cocking handle spring (716/2), in the optional accessory kit (8997/2) (refer to
§ 14.2).
Please note that the cocking handle spring (716/2) will not be used during the following
procedure : it will be used when, if desired, the cocking handle assembly (H1) is moved
towards the left side of the machine gun (also refer to § 12.2).
Also note that, when changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding, it is
not necessary to move the cocking handle assembly (H1) towards the left side of the
machine gun.
12.1.1. Interventions on the bolt group [ 5 ]
• Lift the bolt switch (831) high enough to disengage its hole (a) from the pin (823) (upper left
part of Fig. 12.1.a).
• Turn the bolt switch (831) by approx. 180° in order to align its opposite hole (b) with the pin
(823) and then lower the bolt switch back into position (lower right part of Fig. 12.1.a).
As a result, the groove (c) of the bolt switch (831) will now face the inscription ‘R’ on the upper
side of the bolt (820).
• While holding the extractor/ejector assembly (840) in the vertical position, reinstall it into its
housing in the left side of the bolt (820).
Take into account that the hinge pin of the extractor/ejector assembly (840) is also used to hold
the bolt switch (831) into position.
• Rotate the extractor/ejector assembly (840) forwards to the horizontal position (Fig. 12.1.b).
• Reinstall the bolt assembly (810) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 4 ]

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
Maintenance manual
- 251 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
430 430
477
477
.
460
450 450
478 460
Fig. 12.1.c - Reassembly of the belt feed slide assembly (D2) for a right-hand fed machine gun
473
475
477
471 c
b
D2
a
d
410
Fig. 12.1.d - Installation of the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed slide assembly (D2) for a right-
hand fed machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 252 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

HAND FEEDING (continued)
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 4 ] (continued)
§ 9.4.2.
• Disassemble the belt feed slide assembly (D2) as described in § 9.4.3.
• Reassemble the belt feed pawl (430) and its arm (477) for right-hand feeding (left part of
Fig. 12.1.c).
Please note that, for a right-hand fed machine gun, the belt feed pawl arm (477) should be fitted
onto the opposite side of the belt feed pawl (430) as for a left-hand fed machine gun.
• Fit the assembly formed by the belt feed pawl (430) and its arm (477), together with the
pawl spring (478), into the belt feed slide (450) (left part of Fig. 12.1.c).
The wider extremity of the L-shaped pawl spring (478) should correctly engage its housing in the
belt feed pawl (430) while the other extremity of the spring should correctly fit into the notch
provided in the belt feed slide (450).
On the other hand, the L-shaped pawl spring (478) should be oriented so that its body is at the
side of the belt feed pawl arm (477).
• While pressing on the belt feed pawl (430), align the hole in the pawl and its arm with the
holes of the belt feed slide (450) and then, from any side, reinstall the pin (460) by inserting
it through the aligned holes (Fig. 12.1.c).
The pin (460) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
• Reinstall the belt feed lever (471) and the belt feed slide assembly (D2) by proceeding as
follows (Fig. 12.1.d) :
- Fit the correctly oriented belt feed lever (471) onto the mounting pin (a) of the feed cover
body (410).
- Lightly lubricate the belt feed lever pin (475) and the spring (474).
- Fit the belt feed lever pin (475) into the spring (474) and then insert this assembly, with
the spring first, into the housing (b) in the belt feed lever (471) just before this housing is
at the same height of the edge of the feed cover body (410) when sliding the belt feed
lever back onto the mounting pin (a).
Hold the belt feed lever pin (475) in place with the screwdriver UT 1903.
Please note that, for a right-hand fed machine gun, the housing (b) in the belt feed lever (471)
is used while the hole (c) is used for a left-hand fed machine gun.
- Just after the belt feed lever pin (475) has been held back, insert the belt feed slide
assembly (D2) into its housing in the feed cover body (410) and then align its notch (d)
with the front end of the belt feed lever (471).
The belt feed slide assembly (D2) should be reinstalled so that the belt feed pawl arm (477) is
at the rear side when the feed cover (D1) is closed.
- Push the belt feed lever (471) completely onto the mounting pin (a) and ensure that its
front end correctly engages the notch (d) of the belt feed slide assembly (D2).
- Using the pliers UT 1803, fit the retaining spring (473) into the hole in the mounting pin
(a) in order to secure the belt feed lever (471).
Maintenance manual
- 253 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
3834
3600 3835
3827
3834
Fig. 12.1.e - Installation of the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) for a right-hand fed machine gun
3828
3829
3835
3830
Fig. 12.1.f - Installation of the rear cartridge stop (3830), the link stripper
(3829) and the front cartridge stop (3828) for a right-hand fed machine
gun
Maintenance manual
- 254 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

HAND FEEDING (continued)
12.1.3. Interventions on the feed tray
• If not already done, open the feed cover (D1) by turning its latch shaft (440).
• At the right side of the machine gun, remove the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) and
the front cartridge stop (3828) as described in § 9.2.1.
Contrary to the front cartridge stop (3828), the rear cartridge stop assembly (3500) will not be
reinstalled during the following procedure : it will be replaced by the link stripper (3829) and the
rear cartridge stop (3830) which are supplied in the optional accessory kit (8997/2).
• At the left side of the machine gun, remove the belt holding pawls assembly (3600) as
• At the right side of the machine gun, install the belt holding pawls assembly (3600),
together with the 2 pawl springs (3827), into its mounting support of the feed tray (left part
of Fig. 12.1.e).
One of the extremities of each pawl spring (3827) should correctly engage one of the holes of the
mounting support while the other extremity of the spring should correctly enter into the hole in the
bottom of the corresponding belt holding pawl.
• While pressing on the belt holding pawls assembly (3600), align its hole with the holes in
the mounting support and then, from the rear side, push one of the mounting pins (3835)
completely home (Fig. 12.1.e).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, secure the mounting pin (3835) by inserting one of the locking
pins (3834) into the hole at its front end (Fig. 12.1.e).
• At the left side of the machine gun, fit the correctly oriented rear cartridge stop (3830) into
its mounting slot of the feed tray (Fig. 12.1.f).
The rear cartridge stop (3830) is supplied in the optional accessory kit (8997/2).
• Align the hole in the rear cartridge stop (3830) with the holes in the mounting slot of the
feed tray and then, from the rear side, insert the remaining mounting pin (3835) into the
aligned holes, just far enough to secure the stop into position (Fig. 12.1.f).
• Fit the correctly oriented link stripper (3829) into its mounting slot of the feed tray, align its
hole with the holes in the mounting slot and then push the mounting pin (3835) further
forwards until the link stripper is correctly secured into position (Fig. 12.1.f).
The link stripper (3829) is also supplied in the optional accessory kit (8997/2).
• Fit the correctly oriented front cartridge stop (3828) into its mounting slot of the feed tray,
align its hole with the holes in the mounting slot and then push the mounting pin (3835)
completely home (Fig. 12.1.f).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, secure the mounting pin (3835) by inserting the remaining
locking pin (3834) into the hole at its front end.
Maintenance manual
- 255 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
UT 2111
UT 1180
730
UT 2030
713
730
713
Fig. 12.2.a - Reassembly of the cocking handle (730) and the cocking slide lever (713) for a left-hand
mounted cocking handle assembly (H1)
UT 1910
.
726
726
711
Fig. 12.2.b - Changing the cocking slide stud (726) for a left-hand mounted cocking handle
assembly (H1)
Maintenance manual
- 256 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
12.2. MOVING THE COCKING HANDLE ASSEMBLY (H1) FROM THE RIGHT
SIDE TOWARDS THE LEFT SIDE OF THE MACHINE GUN
NOTE : Moving the cocking handle assembly (H1) from the right side towards the left side of
the machine gun requires 1 new component : the cocking handle spring (716/2).
A cocking handle spring (716/2) is supplied, together with a link stripper (3829) and
a rear cartridge stop (3830), in the optional accessory kit (8997/2) (refer to § 14.2).
Please note that, when changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding, it
is not necessary to move the cocking handle assembly (H1) towards the left side of the
machine gun.
• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• At the right side of the machine gun, remove the cocking handle assembly (H1) as
• Taking into account that the cocking slide assembly (H2) will be released, remove the
assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730) as well as
the cocking handle spring (716/1) as described in § 9.8.3.
The cocking handle spring (716/1) will not be reinstalled during the following procedure : it will
be replaced by the cocking handle spring (716/2) which is supplied in the optional accessory kit
(8997/2).
• Unscrew the cocking handle (730) from the cocking slide lever (713) as described in
§ 9.8.3.
• If the cocking slide lever (713) is fixed into a vice, take it out of the vice, turn it over and
then fix it back into the vice.
When fixing the cocking slide lever (713) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
Please note that, for a left-hand mounted cocking handle assembly (H1), the cocking handle
(730) should be fitted onto the opposite side of the cocking slide lever (713) as for a right-hand
mounted cocking handle assembly.
• Manually screw the cocking handle (730) into the cocking slide lever (713) (left part of
Fig. 12.2.a).
• Using the wrench UT 1180, fully tighten the cocking handle (730) into the cocking slide
lever (713) (left part of Fig. 12.2.a).
• Secure the cocking handle (730) to the cocking slide lever (713) by staking its threaded end
by using the center punch UT 2030 and the hammer UT 2111 (right part of Fig. 12.2.a).
• Take the assembly formed by the cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730)
out of the vice.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, unscrew the cocking slide stud (726) from the cocking slide
bracket (711) (left part of Fig. 12.2.b).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, screw and tighten the cocking slide stud (726) back into its
opposite hole in the cocking slide bracket (711) (right part of Fig. 12.2.b).
Maintenance manual
- 257 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
717
719
730
715 713
716/2 b
711
a
724
714
712
H2
Fig. 12.2.c - Reassembly of a cocking handle assembly (H1) for left-hand mounting
718
H1
B1
711
Fig. 12.2.d - Installation of the cocking handle assembly (H1) onto

the left side of the machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 258 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
SIDE TOWARDS THE LEFT SIDE OF THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• While holding the cocking slide bracket (711) at its correct orientation for its installation
onto the left side of the machine gun, fit the cocking slide assembly (H2), from the right
side, into its slot in the cocking slide bracket (left part of Fig. 12.2.c).
The cocking slide assembly (H2) should be oriented so that the cocking slide stop pin (724) is at
the front side and is facing outwards.
Ensure that the cocking slide plunger (721), which is now at the lower side of the cocking slide
bracket (711), correctly engages the V-notch in the bottom of the cocking slide (712).
• From the left side, fit the cocking handle spring (716/2), the assembly formed by the
cocking slide lever (713) and the cocking handle (730) and then the washer (715) onto the
left end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) (left part of Fig. 12.2.c).
The cocking handle spring (716/2) is supplied in the optional accessory kit (8997/2).
When installing the cocking handle spring (716/2), ensure that its loop (a) fits correctly onto the
cocking slide stop pin (724) and that its bent extremity fits correctly into the hole (b) provided in
the cocking slide lever (713) (Fig. 12.2.c).
• Screw a nut (717), with its grooves facing outwards, onto the left end of the cocking slide
lever stud (714) (Fig. 12.2.c).
• Using the wrench UT 1180, tighten the nut (717) onto the cocking slide lever stud (714)
(Fig. 12.2.c).
with the hole in the left end of the cocking slide lever stud (714).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, fit a split pin (719) into the aligned groove of the nut (717) and
the hole in the left end of the cocking slide lever stud (714) (Fig. 12.2.c).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, lock the split pin (719) by bending its 2 extremities (Fig. 12.2.c).
• Install the cocking handle assembly (H1) onto the left side of the receiver frame (B1) and fix
it by screwing the (shorter) screw (727) and the 2 (longer) screws (728) manually into
position (Fig. 12.2.d).
Please note that the (shorter) screw (727) is used at the lower rear side.
• From the inside of the receiver frame (B1), fit the 2 shoulder bolts (718) into position
(Fig. 12.2.d).
Ensure that the rectangular heads of the shoulder bolts (718) fit correctly into the corresponding
recesses provided inside the receiver frame (B1), taking into account that both the recesses and
the heads have chamfered edges which must be facing each other.
Ensure that the left extremities of the 2 shoulder bolts (718) fit correctly into the corresponding
holes in the cocking slide bracket (711).
Maintenance manual
- 259 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
718
UT 1180
719
717
UT 1803
B1 H1
728
H1
726
728
728 UT 1913
735
UT 1808
727 UT 1808
735
Fig. 12.2.e - Fixing the cocking handle assembly (H1) to the left side of the machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 260 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
SIDE TOWARDS THE LEFT SIDE OF THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• While holding the rectangular heads of the 2 shoulder bolts (718) in position with the
fingers, screw a nut (717), with its grooves facing outwards, onto the left extremity of each
shoulder bolt (upper left part of Fig. 12.2.e).
• Using the wrench UT 1180, tighten the 2 nuts (717) onto the shoulder bolts (718) (upper
left part of Fig. 12.2.e).
Ensure that, at the end of this operation, one of the grooves of the nuts (717) is perfectly aligned
with the hole in the left end of the corresponding shoulder bolt (718).
• For each shoulder bolt (718) and using the pliers UT 1803, fit a split pin (719) into the
aligned groove of the corresponding nut (717) and the hole in the left end of the bolt
(upper right part of Fig. 12.2.e).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, lock both split pins (719) by bending their 2 extremities.
• Firmly tighten the screws (727) and (728) with the screwdriver UT 1913 (middle part and
lower left part of Fig. 12.2.e).
• Using a wire (735) and the lock wire pliers UT 1808 at the rear side of the cocking handle
assembly (H1), secure the (upper) screw (728) and the (lower) screw (727) (lower left part of
Fig. 12.2.e).
The wire should be installed so that, when tension is applied to it, this results in a tightening (and
not a loosening) effort on the screws.
• Again using a wire (735) and the lock wire pliers UT 1808, secure the other screw (728)
and the cocking slide stud (726) (lower right part of Fig. 12.2.e).
The wire should be installed so that, when tension is applied to it, this results in a tightening (and
not a loosening) effort on the screw and the stud.
Maintenance manual
- 261 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
440
440
472 472
.
479 410
479
481 484
481
410
484
Fig. 12.3.a - Installation of the feed cover latch shaft (440) at the right side of the machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 262 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
12.3. MOVING THE FEED COVER LATCH SHAFT (440) FROM THE LEFT
SIDE TOWARDS THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE MACHINE GUN
NOTE : Moving the feed cover latch shaft (440) from the left side towards the right side of
the machine gun does not require new components.
Please note that, when changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding, it
is not necessary to move the feed cover latch shaft (440) towards the right side of the
machine gun.
• Remove the feed cover latch shaft (440) and the feed cover latch (479) as described in
§ 9.4.6.
• Fit the correctly oriented feed cover latch (479) into its mounting slot of the feed cover body
(410) (left part of Fig. 12.3.a).
Ensure that the pointed front part of the feed cover latch (479) fits correctly between the rear end
of its spring (472) and the feed cover body (410).
• Align the hole in the feed cover latch (479) with the holes of its mounting slot of the feed
cover body (410) and then, from the right side, insert the feed cover latch shaft (440) into
the aligned holes, just far enough to secure the feed cover latch into position (left part of
Fig. 12.3.a).
When fitting the feed cover latch shaft (440), from the right side, back into position, a light
pressure will be required on the feed cover latch (479), against the force of its spring (472), in
order to correctly align the pin holes.
• Hold the washer (481) into position in the left notch of the feed cover body (410) and then
push the feed cover latch shaft (440) into the washer and fully home (Fig. 12.3.a).
• With the washer (481) in contact with the right side of the left notch of the feed cover body
(410) and using the pliers UT 1803, fit the split pin (484) into the hole in the left end of the
feed cover latch shaft (440) (Fig. 12.3.a).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, lock the split pin (484) by bending its 2 extremities (right part of
Fig. 12.3.a).
Maintenance manual
- 263 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
X1 1500/1
1520
1421 1521
1400
1522
d 545
1523 548
f
b 1432
1431 e
b 551
1433 (°)
c d 546 547
1431 c 510
1415 1425
a
1434 3654
542 e (°)
f
543
544
549
541
3100
(Fig. 2.c.1)
a
(°)
500/4
3653
3825 (Fig. 2.c.2)
Fig. 13.a - The ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (500/4)
Maintenance manual
- 264 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 13 : KITS
13.1. ‘ANTI-AIRCRAFT SIGHTS’-KIT (500/4) (Fig. 13.a)
13.1.1. Technical data
Distance between ring

and rear sights : 525 mm (20.7”)
Ring sight : External diameter : 165 mm (6.5”)
Rear sight : Double peep-hole for firing from 800 m (lower peep-hole)
and 2000 m (upper peep-hole)
13.1.2. List of parts
500/4 Anti-aircraft sight kit 1

1400 > Ring sight assembly 1
1415 > > Front sight, ring sight 1
1421 > > Hexagonal nut, style 1 1
1425 > > Bracket, ring sight 1
1431 > > Spring, ring sight 2
1432 > > Stop, removable, ring sight 1
1433 > > Pivot nut, ring sight 1
1434 > > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut 1
1500/1 > Rear sight for ring sight 1
510 > > Base assembly, rear sight 1
541 > > Knob, rear sight, windage screw 1
542 > > Pin, knob, windage screw 1
543 > > Plunger, rear sight, windage click 1
544 > > Spring, windage click 1
545 > > Adjusting screw, windage, rear sight 1
546 > > Stop, rear sight leaf 1
547 > > Scale, windage, rear sight 1
548 > > Screw, scale, rear sight 2
549 > > Spring, rear sight base 1
551 > > Screw, sight base (°) 2
1520 > > Peep-hole assembly 1
1521 > > > Peep-hole 1
1522 > > > Hexagonal nut, style 1 1
1523 > > > Base, peep-hole 1
3654 > Screw, externally relieved body (°) 1
3825 > Spring type straight pin, slotted (°) 2
(°) The screws (551), the screw (3654) and the 2 spring pins (3825) will not be described
in this chapter : they are the same and have the same function as the ones provided on
the machine gun without ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (for more information, refer to the parts
of this manual dealing with the receiver group [ 2 ] and the rear sight group [ 6 ]).
Maintenance manual
- 265 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1. ‘ANTI-AIRCRAFT SIGHTS’-KIT (500/4) (continued)
13.1.2. List of parts (continued)

X1 Ring sight 1
13.1.3. Description
The ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (500/4), which can be used for easier and quicker aiming (slightly
less accurate but especially appropriate for aeronautical situations), consists of the following
assemblies and components :
- The 2 spring pins (3825) which are used to secure the ring sight assembly (1400)
The 2 spring pins (3825) are not described in this chapter : they are the same and have the same
function as the ones provided on the machine gun without ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (for more
information, refer to the parts of this manual dealing with the receiver group [ 2 ]).
- The screw (3654) which is used to secure the rear side of the AA rear sight assembly
(1500/1)
The screw (3654) is not described in this chapter : it is the same and has the same function as the
one provided on the machine gun without ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (for more information, refer to
the parts of this manual dealing with the receiver group [ 2 ]).
- The ring sight assembly (1400) which mainly consists of the ring sight bracket (1425)
provided with the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415)
The assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415) is secured to the front lugs of
the ring sight bracket (1425) by means of the pivot nut (1433) onto which it can pivot.
On its turn, the pivot nut (1433) is secured by means of the hexagonal nut (1434).
The ring sight stop (1432), located between the front lugs of the ring sight bracket (1425) and
held in a spring-tensioned position by means of the 2 springs (1431), ensures that the assembly
formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415) is correctly maintained at its lowered and
raised positions.
The ring sight front sight (1415) is screwed, from the bottom, into the ring sight (X1) and receives
the hexagonal nut (1421).
After the ring sight front sight (1415) has been adjusted correctly, it should be locked into
position by means of the hexagonal nut (1421) (counterlocking nut).
Maintenance manual
- 266 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.3. Description (continued)
- The AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) which consists of the rear sight base (510) onto which
the following assemblies and components have been installed :
• The peep-hole assembly (1520) which is secured by and can pivot on the rear sight
windage adjusting screw (545)
The peep-hole assembly (1520) consists of the peep-hole base (1523) provided with a
threaded hole into which the peep-hole (1521) (provided with the hexagonal nut (1522)) is
screwed.
After the peep-hole (1521) has been adjusted correctly, it should be locked into position by
means of the hexagonal nut (1522) (counterlocking nut).
The rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) is screwed, from the right side, through the rear
sight leaf stop (546), the rear sight base (510) and the peep-hole base (1523).
The lateral position of the peep-hole assembly (1520) can be modified by turning the rear
sight windage adjusting screw (545) by using the rear sight windage knob (541). This knob is
fixed to the left end of the screw by means of the pin (542) and is used in combination with
the windage click plunger (543) and its spring (544).
The windage click plunger (543) and its spring (544), fitted into their housing in the rear
sight windage knob (541), allow a precise positioning of the knob by generating a click
each time the knob is rotated by 90°.
• The rear sight windage scale (547) which is fixed to the rear sight base (510) by means
of the 2 screws (548)
• The rear sight base spring (549) which ensures that the peep-hole assembly (1520) is
correctly maintained at its lowered and raised positions
The screws (551), which are used to secure the front side of the AA rear sight assembly
(1500/1), are also part of the assembly.
The screws (551) are not described in this chapter : they are the same and have the same
function as the ones provided on the machine gun without ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (for more
information, refer to the parts of this manual dealing with the rear sight group [ 6 ]).
13.1.4. Preparing the ring sight assembly (1400) and the AA rear sight assembly
(1500/1) for use
• Raise the ring sight assembly (1400) and the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1).
• The peep-hole (1521) has a lower peep-hole set for 800 m and an upper peep-hole set for
2000 m.
Maintenance manual
- 267 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.5. Cleaning
The following procedures should only be carried out in the very rare case of apparent soiling.
Normally, a simple cleaning operation will be sufficient.
(a) Ring sight assembly (1400)
• Completely disassemble the ring sight assembly (1400) by carrying out the different
removal and disassembly procedures given in § 13.1.6.
• Clean the disassembled components with a brush and/or a soft cloth.

• Reassemble the ring sight assembly (1400) by carrying out the different reinstallation
and reassembly procedures given in § 13.1.6.
(b) AA rear sight assembly (1500/1)
• Disassemble the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) by carrying out the different removal
and disassembly procedures given in § 13.1.7.
It is not recommended to remove the rear sight windage scale (547).
• Clean the rear sight base (510) as well as the disassembled components with a brush
• Reassemble the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) by carrying out the different
reinstallation and reassembly procedures given in § 13.1.7.
13.1.6. Disassembly and reassembly of the ring sight assembly (1400)
(a) Removal and reinstallation of the ring sight assembly (1400)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Using the drift punch UT 2012 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the 2 spring pins
(3825).
NOTE : Once they have been removed, the spring pins (3825) must always be replaced
by new ones !
• After the second withdrawal of the drift punch UT 2012, the ring sight assembly (1400)
can be lifted up and off the receiver frame (B1).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the ring
sight bracket (1425) should fit into the 2 outer grooves at the upper front side of the
receiver frame (B1).
Maintenance manual
- 268 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.6. Disassembly and reassembly of the ring sight assembly (1400) (continued)
(b) Removal and reinstallation of the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1)
and its front sight (1415) as well as the ring sight stop (1432)
Requirements : • 2 x UT 1114 (Open-end wrench 10 x 11 mm)

• If necessary, UT 2012 (Drift punch, dia. 3.5 mm, lg 27 mm)
• If necessary, UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• If necessary, remove the ring sight assembly (1400) as described in § 13.1.6 (a).
Please note that this step is not absolutely necessary, as long as the necessary care is taken
not to apply too much force when unscrewing the hexagonal nut (1434) (see further).
When carrying out the following steps, it is recommended that the ring sight (X1) is at its
lowered position.
• Using the 2 wrenches UT 1114, unscrew and remove the hexagonal nut (1434) from
the left extremity of the pivot nut (1433).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the hexagonal nut (1434) must always be replaced by
a new one !
• Taking into account that the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight
(1415) as well as the ring sight stop (1432) and the 2 springs (1431) will be released,
pull the pivot nut (1433) out of the right side of the ring sight bracket (1425).
During this operation, it is recommended to push the ring sight (X1) slightly rearwards as the
latter is subjected to the force of the 2 springs (1431).
• Separate the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415) as well as
the ring sight stop (1432) and the 2 springs (1431) from the ring sight bracket (1425).
points :
- When reinstalling the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415),
the lugs of the ring sight must be oriented as shown in Fig. 13.a.
- Slightly lubricate the 2 springs (1431) and ensure that they correctly engage their
housings in the ring sight stop (1432) and that the stop is oriented as shown in
Fig. 13.a.
- When fitting the pivot nut (1433), from the right side, back into position, a light
rearward pressure will be required on the ring sight stop (1432), against the force of
the 2 springs (1431).
- The (new) hexagonal nut (1434) should be screwed firmly into position.
After any intervention on a sight assembly, the firing precision of the machine gun
should be checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 13.1.8.
Maintenance manual
- 269 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.6. Disassembly and reassembly of the ring sight assembly (1400) (continued)
(c) Removal and reinstallation of the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415)

• 2 x UT 1114 (Open-end wrench 10 x 11 mm)
• If necessary, UT 2012 (Drift punch, dia. 3.5 mm, lg 27 mm)
• If necessary, UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the assembly formed by the ring sight (X1) and its front sight (1415) as
described in § 13.1.6 (b).
• If the same ring sight (X1) and corresponding front sight (1415) will be used again, and
in order to avoid the need to check and, if necessary, to adjust the firing precision of
the machine gun after the reinstallation procedure, measure the distance between the
top of the ring sight front sight and the bottom of the inner ring of the ring sight.
• Using the wrench UT 1108, unscrew the hexagonal nut (1421) and then, taking care
not to lose the nut, screw the ring sight front sight (1415) out of the ring sight (X1).
points :
- If the same ring sight (X1) and corresponding front sight (1415) are used again (see
above), the distance between the top of the ring sight front sight and the bottom of the
inner ring of the ring sight should be the same as the one measured before the
disassembly.
If the ring sight (X1) and/or the corresponding front sight (1415) are replaced by other
ones, and before proceeding to § 13.1.8, it is recommended that the top of the ring
sight front sight protrudes by 8.5 mm from the bottom of the inner ring of the ring sight.
- The ring sight front sight (1415) should be locked into position by firmly tightening the
hexagonal nut (1421).
Maintenance manual
- 270 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.7. Disassembly and reassembly of the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1)
(a) Removal and reinstallation of the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the back plate assembly (600) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910 and taking into account that it also secures the trigger
bar stop assembly (B5) (also refer to § 9.2.13), take out the screw (3654) which
secures the rear part of the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) to the receiver frame (B1).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1910, take out the 2 screws (551) which secure the front part
of the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) to the receiver frame (B1).
• Lift the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) up and off the receiver frame (B1).
points :
- Ensure that the positioning pins underneath the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) fit
correctly into the corresponding holes provided in the upper plate of the receiver frame
(B1).
- Reinstall the trigger bar stop assembly (B5) by proceeding as described in

‘10.5. Adjustment of the timing’.
- After their reinstallation, secure the screws (3654) and (551) by staking their heads by
using the center punch UT 2030 and the hammer UT 2111.
After any intervention on the trigger bar stop assembly (B5), the timing of the machine
gun should be checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.5.
Maintenance manual
- 271 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
(b) Removal and reinstallation of the peep-hole assembly (1520), the rear
(545)
Please note that, for this operation, it is not necessary to remove the AA rear sight assembly
(1500/1).
Requirements : • UT 1913 (Screwdriver 5.5 x 150 mm)

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Using the drift punch UT 2005 and the hammer UT 2111, drive out the pin (542).
one !
• After having withdrawn the drift punch UT 2005 and taking into account that the
windage click plunger (543) and its spring (544) will be released, pull the rear sight
windage knob (541) off the left end of the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1913 from the right side and taking into account that both
the peep-hole assembly (1520) and the rear sight leaf stop (546) will be released,
completely unscrew the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) out of the rear sight
base (510).
During this operation, it is recommended to push down slightly on the peep-hole assembly
(1520) as the latter is subjected to the force of the rear sight base spring (549).
• Lift the peep-hole assembly (1520) up and off the rear sight base (510).
• If it did not come out yet, take the rear sight leaf stop (546) out of its hole in the right
side of the rear sight base (510).
points :
- The rear sight leaf stop (546) should be fitted, from the outside and with its narrower
end first, into its hole in the right side of the rear sight base (510).
- When fitting the peep-hole assembly (1520) back into position, ensure that its
graduation is facing rearwards.
- When screwing the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545), from the right side, back
into position, a light downward pressure will be required on the peep-hole assembly
(1520), against the force of the rear sight base spring (549), in order to correctly align
the screw holes.
Ensure that the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545) fits correctly and completely into the
hole in the left side of the rear sight base (510).
Maintenance manual
- 272 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
(b) Removal and reinstallation of the peep-hole assembly (1520), the rear
(545) (continued)
- When reinstalling the windage click plunger (543), first fit it onto its spring (544) and
then insert this assembly, slightly lubricated and with the free extremity of the spring first,
into the hole in the right side of the rear sight windage knob (541).
holes in the rear sight windage knob (541) with the corresponding hole in the left end
of the rear sight windage adjusting screw (545).
- Before proceeding to § 13.1.8, it is recommended that the peep-hole assembly (1520)

is centered inside the rear sight base (510).
(c) Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight windage scale (547)
(1500/1).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1903, take out the 2 screws (548) which secure the rear sight
windage scale (547) to the rear sight base (510).
• Remove the rear sight windage scale (547).
Maintenance manual
- 273 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

(continued)
(d) Removal and reinstallation of the rear sight base spring (549)
(1500/1).

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the peep-hole assembly (1520) as described in § 13.1.7 (b).
• Remove the rear sight windage scale (547) as described in § 13.1.7 (c).
• Using the drift punch UT 2004 and the hammer UT 2111, disengage the rear sight
base spring (549) from its housing in the rear sight base (510).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order taking into account that the rear
sight base spring (549), which should be lightly lubricated before its reinstallation, should
fit completely into its housing in the rear sight base (510).
(e) Disassembly and reassembly of the peep-hole assembly (1520)

(1500/1).

• UT 2111 (Hammer 250 g)
• Remove the peep-hole assembly (1520) as described in § 13.1.7 (b).
• Using the wrench UT 1108, unscrew the hexagonal nut (1522) and then manually
screw the peep-hole (1521) (with the hexagonal nut) out of the peep-hole base (1523).
• Manually unscrew and remove the hexagonal nut (1522) from the peep-hole (1521).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that, before
proceeding to § 13.1.8, it is recommended that there is a distance of 43 mm between the
top of the peep-hole (1521) and the top of the peep-hole base (1523).
Maintenance manual
- 274 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.8. Checking and adjusting the firing precision of the machine gun
NOTE : In order to increase the accuracy of the following checking procedure, it is

recommended to use the machine gun on a tripod or to fix it in a fixing support such
as a shooting adjustment device, ...
In any case, eliminate the less accurate impact.
The firing precision should periodically be checked by proceeding as follows :
• Turn the safety catch outwards so that the trigger (641) is no longer blocked into
position and ensure that the bolt latch release (639) is unlocked and raised.
• Using the (lower) ‘800 m’ peep-hole, aim the machine gun at a well-determined point
on a safe target located at 50 m.
• Fire 6 single shots and eliminate the less accurate impact.
• At the target, check if the 6-1 impacts are situated within a square with a side of
30 cm.
If so, directly proceed to the next step.
If not, repeat the shooting procedure at least twice.
If, during these next tries, the 6-1 impacts are still not situated within a square with a side of
30 cm, this indicates that the barrel (110) / (110/1) of the machine gun is showing signs of
wear : replace the barrel and then restart this checking procedure.
• At the target, determine the mean point of impact (MPI).
• If the MPI corresponds to an imaginary point approx. 220 mm above the point of aim,
the firing precision is correct.
If not, the firing precision should be adjusted as described in the following § 13.1.8 (b).
(b) Adjustment procedure

The AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) should be adjusted after each intervention (removal,
disassembling, ...) on the sights of the machine gun.
The ring sight front sight (1415) (with its top protruding by 8.5 mm from the bottom of the inner
ring of the ring sight (X1)) should only be adjusted if the AA rear sight assembly (1500/1) does
not allow a correct adjustment of the vertical position of the MPI.
For the adjustment of the ring sight front sight (1415) proceed as described for the peep-hole
(1521) taking into account that the elevation effect on the MPI is opposite.
The adjustment procedure should also be carried out if required by the checking
procedure of the previous § 13.1.8 (a).
Maintenance manual
- 275 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
13.1.8. Checking and adjusting the firing precision of the machine gun (continued)
(b) Adjustment procedure (continued)
Proceed as follows :
• Check the firing precision of the machine gun as described in § 13.1.8 (a).
If the MPI corresponds to an imaginary point approx. 220 mm above the point of aim, the
following adjustment procedure should not be carried out.
If not, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
• If a vertical correction of the MPI is required, proceed as follows :

- Using the wrench UT 1108, unscrew the hexagonal nut (1522) in order to unlock
the peep-hole (1521).
- Manually, or using the wrench UT 1108, rotate the peep-hole (1521) by half turns
in order to correct the vertical position of the MPI.
In order to lower the MPI, turn the peep-hole (1521) in the clockwise direction
(downwards).
In order to raise the MPI, turn the peep-hole (1521) in the counterclockwise direction
(upwards).
Take into account that each half turn of the peep-hole (1521) will change the vertical
position of the MPI by 3.6 cm on a target located at 50 m.
- Using the wrench UT 1108, firmly screw the hexagonal nut (1522) in order to lock
the peep-hole (1521) back into position.
• If a lateral correction of the MPI is required, proceed as follows :
- Turn the rear sight windage knob (541) in order to correct the lateral position of the
MPI.
In order to move the MPI towards the right (left) side, turn the rear sight windage knob
(541) in the (counter)clockwise direction when viewed from the left side.
Take into account that each 90° turn of the rear sight windage knob (541) will generate a
click and that each click corresponds to a change of the lateral position of the MPI by
2.5 mils.
- After this lateral correction of the MPI, it is most probable that the ‘0’ line on the
rear sight windage scale (547) is not correctly aligned with the mark on the peep-
hole base (1523).
In such a case, correct the position of the rear sight windage scale (547) by
proceeding as follows :
- Using the screwdriver UT 1903, slightly loosen the 2 screws (548) which secure
the rear sight windage scale (547) to the rear sight base (510).
- Correct the position of the rear sight windage scale (547) and then tighten the 2
screws (548).
• Check if the firing precision of the machine gun is now correct.
If so, the adjustment is terminated.
If not, repeat the adjustment procedure until a correct firing precision is obtained.
Maintenance manual
- 276 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 277 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1080
1090
1091
Fig. 14.a - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part I)
Maintenance manual
- 278 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 14 : ACCESSORIES
14.1. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART I) (Fig. 14.a)
1005 Barrel periscopic inspection device (*) 1

1080/1 Cover, web, barrel (olive-green) 1
1080/2 Cover, web, barrel (sand-yellow) 1
1090/2 Cover, web, complete weapon (sand-yellow) 1
1090/3 Cover, cordura, complete weapon (olive-green) 1
1091 Pair of gloves, anti-heat 1
(*) Not illustrated
Maintenance manual
- 279 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
164 160
4x
161
165
4x
163
162
400
8997/2 3829
716/2
3830
Fig. 14.b - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part II)
Maintenance manual
- 280 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
14.2. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART II) (Fig. 14.b)
160 Flash-hider assembly 1

161 > Cone, flash-hider 1
162 > Ring, retaining, flash-hider 1
163 > Segment, flash-hider 2
164 > Screw, cap, hexagonal head 4
165 > Nut, self-locking hexagonal, low height 4
400 Machine, linking and delinking, cal. .50, M7 1
8997/2 Inversion kit feed & cocking from L to R hand 1
716/2 > Spring, helical torsion 1
3829 > Stripper, link 1
3830 > Stop, rear, cartridge 1
Maintenance manual
- 281 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1100 1108
3817
(Fig. 2.c.1)
c
c
1104
1103
1120
b
b
1102 a
1117
1105
1106
1121/2
UT 1704 1121/3
Fig. 14.c - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part III)
Maintenance manual
- 282 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
14.3. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART III) (Fig. 14.c)
1100 CRB for MI.50 QCB 1

1102 > Washer, piston, expansion chamber 1
1103 > Piston, expansion chamber 1
1104 > Cover, holding, recoil booster 1
1105 > Plug CRB-QCB assembly 1
1106 > > Single coil spring washer strong serie 1
1108 > Ring, piston, combined recoil booster 2
1117 > Washer, tightening recoil booster cover 1
1120 > Parts, fixing recoil booster assembly 1
1121/2 > Discriminator for Blank Star cartridge 1
1121/3 > Discriminator, plastic-type cartridge 1
UT 1704 > C-spanner 80/120 1
Tools
UT 1703 C-spanner 50/80 (*) 1

UT 2112 Hammer 300 g (*) 1
OREA 779 Punch for washer (*) 1
(*) Not illustrated
Maintenance manual
- 283 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
500/1 (*)
e
523
528
e
529 525
d
526 524
d
527
522 500/2
a
521 545
c
520
546
b
548 8997/1 (°)
a
551
510/2
505
547
340
542 b
2x
c
543 549 408
2x
541
544 564
563
565
f
Fig. 14.d - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part IV)
Maintenance manual
- 284 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
14.4. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART IV) (Fig. 14.d)
500/1 Rear sight assembly (metric graduation) (*) 1

500/2 > Rear sight assembly 1
510/2 > > Base assembly, rear sight 1
520 > > Leaf assembly, rear sight 1
521 > > > Leaf, rear sight 3 1
522 > > > Slide, rear sight 1
523 > > > Knob, elevating screw 1
524 > > > Screw, elevating, rear sight slide 1
525 > > > Pin rear sight, elevating knob 1
526 > > > Pin, retainer, rear sight, elevating screw 1
527 > > > Nut, half, rear sight 1
528 > > > Plunger, elevating, rear sight 1
529 > > > Spring, plunger, elevating, rear sight 1
551 > > Screw, sight base 2
563 > > Lock, rear sight base 1
564 > > Spring, rear sight base lock 2
565 > > Screw 1
505 > Support, intermediate, telescope w/NATO base 1
8997/1 Kit Picatinny rail (°) 1
340 > Safety washer scored 2
408 > Hexagonal socket head cap screw, thin head 2
(°) Same kit as the one listed in the table of § 14.5 and represented on Fig. 14.e
Maintenance manual
- 285 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1500/3 (-)
1500/2
1521
1522
1520
a 545
1523
c
546
b
548 8997/1 (°)
a
551
510/2
505
547
340
542 b
2x
c
543 549 408
2x
541
544 564
563
565
d
Fig. 14.e - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part V)
Maintenance manual
- 286 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
14.5. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART V) (Fig. 14.e)
1500/3 Dual AA rear sight with NATO support (-) 1

505 > Support, intermediate, telescope w/NATO base 1
1500/2 > Dual AA rear sight assembly 1
565 > > Screw 1
1521 > > > Peep-hole 1
8997/1 Kit Picatinny rail (°) 1
340 > Safety washer scored 2
408 > Hexagonal socket head cap screw, thin head 2
(°) Same kit as the one listed in the table of § 14.4 and represented on Fig. 14.d
Maintenance manual
- 287 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
500/3 (-)
1500/2
1521
1522
1520
The ring sight sighting system
a 545 (1400/1) is not visually
1523 represented
c
546
b
548
a 3654
551
510/2
547 505/1
542 b
553
c
543
541
544 564
549
d
552
563
565
d
Fig. 14.f - Accessories of the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (part VI)
Maintenance manual
- 288 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
14.6. LIST OF ACCESSORIES (PART VI) (Fig. 14.f)
500/3 Kit rear sight, ring sight (-) 1

505/1 > Support, intermediate, ring sight 1
552 > Lockwire MS 9226-04 L 300mm 1
553 > Screw, securing 2
1400/1 > Ring sight sighting system 1
1500/2 > Dual AA rear sight assembly 1
565 > > Screw 1
1521 > > > Peep-hole 1
3654 > Screw, externally relieved body 1
Maintenance manual
- 289 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1060
1010
1040
1020
1075
1071 1032
1031
1073
1050
1072
UT 2012
OREA 94 ACCE895
ACCE895/1
Fig. 15.1.a - Tool kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (1000) and (1000/1)
Maintenance manual
- 290 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 15 : TOOLS AND GAUGES
15.1. TOOLS
15.1.1. Tool kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun (1000) and (1000/1)
(Fig. 15.1.a)
CAT n° Description
1000 Complete tool kit n° 2 QCB, fixed timing (olive-green)

1010 > Cleaning rod
1020 > > Handle assembly
1031 > > Section, cleaning rod
1032 > > Swab, holder, section, cleaning rod
1040 > Brush, cleaning, complete, chamber
1050 > Complete barrel cleaning brush
1060 > Brush, cleaning, firing pin hole, cal .50
1071 > Rod cleaning for firing pin hole
1072 > Cleaning rod
1073 > Ruptured case extractor
1075 > Handle, bolt (auxiliary use only)
ACCE895 > Roll, tool (olive-green)
OREA 94 > Oil can, complete with small chain painted
UT 2012 > Drift punch, dia. 3.5 mm, lg 27 mm
1000/1 Complete tool kit n° 2 QCB, fixed timing (sand-yellow)
1010 > Cleaning rod
1020 > > Handle assembly
1031 > > Section, cleaning rod
1032 > > Swab, holder, section, cleaning rod
1040 > Brush, cleaning, complete, chamber
1050 > Complete barrel cleaning brush
1060 > Brush, cleaning, firing pin hole, cal .50
1071 > Rod cleaning for firing pin hole
1072 > Cleaning rod
1073 > Ruptured case extractor
1075 > Handle, bolt (auxiliary use only)
ACCE895/1 > Roll, tool (sand-yellow)
OREA 94 > Oil can, complete with small chain painted
Maintenance manual
- 291 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
OREA 235
OREA 269
OREA 228
OREA 554
OREA 270
OREA 574
OREA 558
OREA 721
OREA 722
OREA 742
OREA 806
OREA 800
OREA 801 (-)

OREA 798 (*)
OREA 802 OREA 807
Fig. 15.1.b - Separate OREA for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 292 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.1. TOOLS (continued)
15.1.2. List of separate OREA (Fig. 15.1.b)
CAT n° Description
OREA 228 Wrench for ring guide, barrel MI.50

OREA 235 Screwdriver 13x3.8 (hexagonal tip) modified
OREA 269 Rod, firing pin spring
OREA 270 Wrench, nut, bolt latch rod
OREA 554 Wrench, back plate handle screw
OREA 558 Tool, assembling, bolt latch, .50 machine gun
OREA 574 Tool, MI.50 buffer spring
OREA 721 Center punch, flat-end
OREA 722 Center punch, round-end
OREA 742 Tooling for sleeve support, barrel
OREA 798 Drift, 1.2x10mm dia. (*)
OREA 800 Bush for OREA 801
OREA 806 Tip and blade assembly, screwdriver
OREA 801 > Tip, screwdriver, bladed (-)
OREA 802 > Blade, screwdriver, spare 801
OREA 807 > Spring type straight pin, slotted
OREA 848 Riveting clamp depressor, breech, lock (°)
(°) Not illustrated
(-) Not separately available as a spare part
Maintenance manual
- 293 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.1.3. List of UT (not illustrated)
CAT n° Description
UT 1039 Combination wrench 1 1/8”

UT 1110 Open-end wrench 7 x 9 mm
UT 1175 Open-end wrench 1/2 x 9/16”
UT 1304 Straight box wrench 12 x 13 mm
UT 1425 Bar, dia. 6 mm
UT 1621 Hexagonal key 1/8”
UT 1802 Cutting pliers
UT 1803 Half-round nose pliers
UT 1808 Lock wire pliers
UT 1903 Screwdriver 3 x 75 mm
UT 1910 Screwdriver 10 x 200 mm
UT 1913 Screwdriver 5.5 x 150 mm
UT 2003 Drift punch, dia. 3.9 mm, lg 50 mm
UT 2004 Drift punch, dia. 5 mm, lg 40 mm
UT 2030 Center punch, dia. 6 mm
UT 2111 Hammer 250 g
UT 2203 Feeler gauge
UT 2301 Torque wrench
UT 2322 Screwdriver socket, torque wrench, 1/2”
UT 2442 Twist drill, dia. 5.1 mm
Maintenance manual
- 294 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.1.3. List of UT (not illustrated) (continued)
For the flash-hider assembly (160) (also refer to § 14.2) :
CAT n° Description
For the NATO base rear sight assembly (500/1) and the kit Picatinny rail (8997/1) (also refer to
§ 14.4) :
CAT n° Description
UT 1609 Hexagonal key 6 mm
For the ‘anti-aircraft sights’-kit (500/4) (also refer to § 13.1) :
CAT n° Description

For the NATO base AA rear sight assembly (1500/3) and the kit Picatinny rail (8997/1) (also
refer to § 14.5) :
CAT n° Description

For the NATO base AA rear sight assembly with AA rear optical sight (500/3) (also refer to
§ 14.6) :
CAT n° Description

Maintenance manual
- 295 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
OREA 255
OREA 797
1079/1
1645 1079/2
UT 2006
OREA 870
1610
1700
Fig. 15.2.a - FM/AM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
(1000/2) and (1000/4)
Maintenance manual
- 296 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.2. GAUGES
15.2.1. FM/AM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine
gun (1000/2) and (1000/4) (Fig. 15.2.a)
CAT n° Description
1000/2 Kit QCB, FM/AM armourer (olive-green)

1079/1 > Envelope, gauges (olive-green)
1610 > Headspace gauge .50 QCB
1645 > Fixed timing gauge
1700 > Device for adjustment headspace
OREA 255 > Wrench, front sight
OREA 797 > Adjusting screw
OREA 870 > Drift-pin, placement pin, breech lock pin
1000/4 Kit QCB, FM/AM armourer (sand-yellow)
1079/2 > Envelope, gauges (sand-yellow)
Maintenance manual
- 297 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
OREA 255
OREA 797
1079/1
1645 1079/2
1610
UT 2006
OREA 870
G097
1700
Fig. 15.2.b - GM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
(1000/3) and (1000/5)
Maintenance manual
- 298 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.2. GAUGES (continued)
15.2.2. GM tools and gauges kit for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
(1000/3) and (1000/5) (Fig. 15.2.b)
CAT n° Description
1000/3 Kit QCB, GM armourer (olive-green)

1079/1 > Envelope, gauges (olive-green)
G097 > Headspace selection gauge (0736675257)
UT 2006 > Drift punch, dia. 2.4 mm, lg 21mm
1000/5 Kit QCB, GM armourer (sand-yellow)
1079/2 > Envelope, gauges (sand-yellow)
G097 > Headspace selection gauge (0736675257)
Maintenance manual
- 299 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
1671
GO
1650 (*)
NO GO
1673
NO GO GO
1682
1690 (**)
1695 (**)
G028
MAXI MINI
G093
Fig. 15.2.c - Separate gauges for the MI.50 M2HB QCB infantry machine gun
Maintenance manual
- 300 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
15.2. GAUGES (continued)
15.2.3. List of separate gauges (Fig. 15.2.c)
CAT n° Description
1650 Bullet lead inspection (*)

1671 Gauge, checking, length, cartridge slot
1673 Gauge, checking, firing pin hole
1682 Gauge, checking, piston head
1695 Box, barrel gauges (**)
1690 > Gauge, calibrating, wear gauge (**)
G028 Firing pin protrusion (66-7-5105)
G093 Copper gauge for STL and CHR .50 barrels
(*) Only MI.50 M2HB QCB with chrome-plated barrel

(**) Only MI.50 M2HB QCB with stellited chrome-plated barrel
Maintenance manual
- 301 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
Maintenance manual
- 302 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2
CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
Maintenance manual
- 303 - Catalog n° 3660084070
2009 08 EN Change 2

Mi.50 M2HB QCB Infanteria

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mi.50 M2HB QCB Infanteria

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FN HERSTAL

MI.50 M2HB QCB

August 2009 (Change 2)

THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.

IT MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED

NOTES : - The descriptions and illustrations in this maintenance manual may

- Data in this manual is technical only and of no contractual value.

1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9

CHAPTER 2 : IDENTIFICATION OF THE PARTS

2.1. How to order parts ............................................................................................ 15

CHAPTER 3 : OPERATING PRINCIPLES

3.1. Empty machine gun in the initial condition ........................................................... 69

CHAPTER 4 : SAFETY INFORMATION

4.1. Warnings and cautions ...................................................................................... 83

CHAPTER 5 : RECEPTION OF THE GUN

CHAPTER 6 : USING THE MACHINE GUN

6.1. Preparatory operations ....................................................................................... 89

CHAPTER 7 : FIELD STRIPPING

7.1. Disassembling the machine gun ......................................................................... 97

8.1. Lubricant specifications .................................................................................... 107

CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

9.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] ............................................................................................ 119

CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (continued)

9.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] ......................................................................................... 123

CHAPTER 9 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (continued)

9.5. Bolt group [ 5 ] ............................................................................................... 171

CHAPTER 10 : INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS

10.1. Checking the firing precision ............................................................................ 219

CHAPTER 12 : SPECIAL INTERVENTIONS

13.1. ‘Anti-aircraft sights’-kit (500/4) ......................................................................... 265

14.1. List of accessories (part I) ................................................................................. 279

CHAPTER 15 : TOOLS AND GAUGES

15.1. Tools .............................................................................................................. 291

Stellited chrome-plated barrel

Barrel Chrome-plated Stellited chrome-plated

Ammunition feeding Left-hand (*) Left-hand (*)

Empty cases ejection Downwards Downwards

Links ejection To the right (**) To the right (**)

Trigger On the back plate On the back plate

Provided with a safety Provided with a safety

Back plate Spade grips Spade grips

1.3. TECHNICAL DATA

1.3.1. Dimensions and weight

Chrome-plated barrel Stellited chrome-plated barrel

Overall length 1654 mm (65.1“)

Width 228 mm (9.0”)

Height 193 mm (7.6”) (°)

Weight (empty) ± 38 kg (84 lb)

1.3.2. Functional data

Operating principle : By short-recoil of the barrel

1.3. TECHNICAL DATA (continued)

.50 (12.7 x 99 mm) calibre ammunition

Overall length : 138.43 mm (5.45”)

Muzzle velocity : 916 m/s with M33

Initial kinetic energy : 18,040 J with M33

Effective range : 1,850 m (± 6,000 ft) (depending on the ammunition)

Maximum range : 6,500 m (± 21,000 ft)

Main types of ammunition :

Name Bullet tip colour Ammunition type

M33 None Ball

M17 Red T (Tracer)

AP-M8 Black AP (Armour - Piercing)

API-M8 Silver API (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary)

Ammunition feeding Left-hand () Left-hand ()

Links ejection To the right () To the right ()